G170 G190 G210 G240: Operator'S Manual

G170
G190
G210
G240
OPERATOR’S
MANUAL
603.64.331.00
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Title Page
Introduction
To the Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Important Ecological Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Safety Decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
International Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Airborne Noise Emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Section 1 - General Information

Protective Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Controls and Instruments - Overview and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Section 2 - Operation
Cab Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Cab Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Electronic Instrument Cluster (EIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Tractor Performance Monitor (TPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Programming the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Powershift Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Operating the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Independent Power Take Off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Remote Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Three-Point Hitch Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Three-Point Hitch Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Track Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Ballasting and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Section 3 - Lubrication and Maintenance

Initial Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Guard Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Lubrication and Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Air Cleaner Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
10- hour/Daily Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
50- hour Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
300- hour Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
600- hour Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
900- hour/12 Month Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1200- hour/12 Month Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2400- hour/24 Month Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
General Maintenance - As Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Section 4 - Trouble- shooting
Section 5 - Specifications
First 50- hour Service Forms
Section 6 - Index
i
TO THE OWNER
GENERAL FIRST 50 HOUR SERVICE
This Manual has been prepared to assist you in the At the back of this Manual (just before the index) you
correct procedure for running- in, driving and operat- will find the 50- hour service reports.
ing and for the maintenance your new tractor.
After you have operated the tractor for 50 hours, take

your tractor, together with this Manual, to your dealer.
Read this Manual carefully and keep it in a convenient He will then perform the factory recommended 50 hour
place for future reference. If at any time you require service and complete the service report sheets (pages
advice concerning your tractor, do not hesitate to 1 and3). The first sheet (page 1) is the dealer’s copy
contact your authorised dealer. He has factory trained and should be removed by the dealer after the service
personnel, genuine manufacturers’ parts and the has been carried out. The second sheet (page 3) is
necessary equipment to carry out all your service your copy of the service performed. Ensure that you
requirements. and the dealer sign both copies.
Your tractor was designed to power and propel itself. It

is intended for use in normal and customary agricul-
tural applications. SERVICE PARTS
We would like to point out that ‘non- genuine’ parts
have not been examined and approved by the Com-
pany. The installation and/or use of such products
could have negative effects upon the design charac-
Your tractor has been designed and built to give
teristics of your tractor and thereby affect it’s safety.
maximum performance, economy and ease of
The Company is not liable for any damage caused by
operation under a wide variety of operating
the use of ‘non- genuine’ parts and accessories.
conditions. Prior to delivery, the tractor was carefully
inspected, both at the factory and by your dealer to
ensure that it reaches you in optimum condition. To
maintain this condition and ensure trouble- free
It is prohibited to carry out any modifications to the
operation, it is important that the routine services, as
tractor unless specifically authorised, in writing, by the
specified in section 3 of this Manual, are carried out at
After Sales Service department of the Company.
the recommended intervals.
WARRANTY
Your tractor is warranted according to legal rights in
SAFETY
your country and the contractual agreement with the
Pages vi to xi inclusive list the precautions to be selling dealer. No warranty shall, however, apply if the
observed to ensure your safety and the safety of tractor has not been used, adjusted and maintained
others. Read the safety precautions and follow the according to the instructions given in the Operator’s
advice offered before operating the tractor. Manual.
ii
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
The tractor and major components are identified using
serial numbers and/or manufacturing codes. The
following provides the locations of the identification
data.
NOTE: Tractor identification data must be supplied to

the dealer when requesting parts or service.
Identification data is needed to aid in identifying the

tractor if it is ever stolen.
1
Tractor Identification - Figure 1
The serial number and identification information is
stamped on the top of the front support (1). Record the
numbers below for quick reference.
Vehicle Identification Plate - Figures 1 and 2

The vehicle identification plate is located on the inner
face of the hood, low down on the right- hand side, as
shown at (2) Figure 1. Record the information on the
sample identification plate provided on the right
(Figure 2).
Engine Identification - Figure 3

The engine identification information is located on a
plate (1) on the right side of the engine rocker cover.
Record the information below for quick reference.
Serial No.
Build Date
Model No. 3
iii
Four Wheel Drive Identification - Figure 4

The serial number and axle type are on the plate (1)
located on the front of the axle housing. Record the
information below for quick reference.
Part No.
Serial No.
Date
Transmission Identification - Figure 5

The serial number and type are located on the plate
(1) on the lower right side of the transmission. Record
the information below for quick reference.
Model
Specification
Serial No.
Rear Axle Identification - Figure 6

The serial number (1) is stamped on the left side of the
P.T.O. boss on the rear axle housing. Record the serial
number below for quick reference.
Serial No.
iv
Cab Identification - Figure 7

The serial number is on the certification plate (1) on
the rear crossrail. Record the serial number below for
quick reference.
Cab Serial No.
IMPORTANT ECOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS
Soil, air and water are vital factors of agriculture and 3. Modern oils contain additives. Do not burn
life in general. Where legislation does not yet rule the contaminated fuels and/or waste oils in ordinary
treatment of some of the substances which are heating systems.
required by advance technology, common sense
should govern the use and disposal of the products of 4. Avoid spillage when draining off used engine
a chemical and petrochemical nature. coolant mixtures, engine, gearbox and hydraulic oils,
brake fluids, etc. Do not mix drained brake fluids or
The following are recommendations which may be of fuels with lubricants. Store them safely until they can
assistance: be disposed of in a proper way to comply with local
legislation and available resources.
• Become acquainted with and ensure that you
understand the relative legislation applicable to your 5. Modern coolant mixtures, i.e. antifreeze and other
country. additives, should be replaced every two years. They
should not be allowed to get into the soil but should be
• Where no leglislation exists, obtain information collected and disposed of safely.
from suppliers of oils, fuels, antifreeze, cleaning
agents, etc., with regard to their effect on man and 6. Do not open the air- conditioning system yourself.
nature and how to safely store, use and diispose of It contains gases which should not be released into the
these substances. Agricultural consultants will, in atmosphere. Your dealer or air conditioning specialist
many cases, be able to help you as well. has a special extractor for this purpose and will have to
recharge the system anyway.
7. Repair any leaks or defects in the engine cooling

HELPFUL HINTS
or hydraulic system immediately.
1. Avoid filling tanks using jerrycans or inappropriate
pressurised fuel delivery systems which may cause 8. Do not increase the pressure in a pressurised
considerable spillage. circuit as this may lead to the components exploding.
2. In general, avoid skin contact with all fuels, oils, 9. Protect hoses during welding as penetrating weld
acids, solvents, etc. Most of them contain substances splatter may burn a hole or weaken them, causing the
which can be harmful to your health. loss of oils, coolant, etc.
v
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A careful operator is the best operator. Most accidents THE TRACTOR
can be avoided by observing certain precautions. To 1. Read the Operator’s Manual carefully before us-
help prevent accidents, read and take the following
ing the tractor. Lack of operating knowledge can lead
precautions before driving, operating or servicing the
to accidents.
tractor. Equipment should be operated only by those
who are responsible and instructed to do so.
2. Only allow properly trained and qualified persons
to operate the tractor.
PRECAUTIONARY STATEMENTS
Throughout this Manual you will see text in italics, 3. To prevent falls, use the handrails and step plates
preceded by the words NOTE, ATTENTION, when getting on and off the tractor. Keep steps and
IMPORTANT CAUTION, WARNING or DANGER. platform clear of mud and debris.
Such text has the following significance:
4. Replace all missing, illegible or damaged safety

decals.
Machine Safety
NOTE: This text stresses a correct operating tech-
nique or procedure. 5. Keep safety decals free of dirt or grime.
ATTENTION: This text warns the operator of potential

machine damage if a certain procedure is not followed.
IMPORTANT: This text informs the reader of some-

thing that he needs to know to prevent minor machine
damage if a certain procedure is not followed.
Personal Safety
CAUTION: The word CAUTION is used
where a safe behavioural practice, according
to operating and maintenance instructions and com-
mon safety practices will protect the operator and 6. Do not permit anyone but the operator to ride on
others from accident involvement. the tractor unless a passenger seat is fitted. There is
no safe place for extra passengers otherwise.
WARNING: The word WARNING denotes a
potential or hidden hazard hazard which
7. Keep children away from the tractor and farm ma-
could possibly cause serious injury. It is used to warn
chinery at all times.
operators and others to exercise due care and
attention to avoid a surprise accident with machinery.
8. Do not modify or alter or permit anyone else to
DANGER: The word DANGER denotes a modify or alter the tractor or any of its components or
forbidden practice in connection with a any tractor function without first consulting your
serious hazard. dealer.
Failure to follow the CAUTION, WARNING and

DANGER instructions may result in serious bodily 9. Install all guards before starting the engine or op-
inury or even death. erating the tractor.
vi
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
DRIVING THE TRACTOR

1. Always sit in the driver’s seat while starting or driv-
ing the tractor.
2. When driving on public roads, have consideration

for other road users. Pull in to the side of the road oc-
casionally to allow any following traffic to pass. Do not
exceed the legal speed limit set in your country for ag-
ricultural tractors.
3. Use a rotating beacon when driving on public

roads to indicate that the vehicle is slow moving and a 8. Keep the tractor in the same gear when going
possible hazard. downhill as would be used when going uphill. Do not
coast or freewheel down hills.
4. Dip the tractor lights when meeting a vehicle at
9. Any towed vehicle whose total weight exceeds
night. Make sure the lights are adjusted to prevent
that of the towing tractor must be equipped with
blinding the driver of an oncoming vehicle.
brakes for safe operation.
5. Reduce speed before turning or applying the 10. Never apply the differential lock when turning.
brakes. Ensure that both brake pedals are locked When engaged, the differential lock will prevent the
together when travelling at road speeds or when on tractor from turning.
public roads. Brake both wheels simultaneously when
making an emergency stop. 11. Always check overhead clearance, especially
when transporting the tractor. Watch where you are
going, especially at row ends, on roads and around
6. On four wheel drive tractors, the drive to the front trees and low overhanging obstacles.
axle is automatically engaged when the brakes are
applied to provide four wheel braking. Owners should 12. To avoid overturns, drive the tractor with care and
be aware of the effectiveness of four wheel braking at speeds compatible with safety, especially when op-
which greatly enhances braking performance. Appro- erating over rough ground, when crossing ditches or
priate care should be exercised during fierce braking. slopes and when turning corners.
13. Use extreme caution when operating on steep

slopes.
7. Use extreme caution and avoid hard application 14. If the tractor becomes stuck or the tyres are frozen
of the tractor brakes when towing heavy loads at road to the ground, reverse the tractor out to prevent over-
speeds. turning.
vii
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
OPERATING THE TRACTOR

1. Apply the parking brake, place the P.T.O. control
in the ‘OFF’ position, the lift control lever in the down
position, the remote control valve levers in the neutral
position and the transmission levers in neutral before
starting the tractor.
2. Do not start the engine or operate controls (other

than the external hydraulic lift switches) while stand-
ing beside the tractor. Always sit in the tractor seat
when starting the engine or operating the controls.
3. Do not bypass the transmission and P.T.O. neu- 8. Do not park the tractor on a steep incline.
tral start switches. Consult your authorised dealer if
your neutral start controls malfunction. Use jump
9. The cab is designed to provide the minimum
leads only in the recommended manner. Improper use
noise level at the operator’s ears and, in fact, meets or
can result in a tractor runaway.
exceeds applicable standards in this respect. How-
ever, noise (sound pressure level) in the workplace
can exceed 85 dB(A) when working between build-
ings or in confined spaces, with cab windows open.
Therefore, it is recommended that operators wear
suitable ear protectors when operating in high noise
level conditions.
4. Avoid accidental contact with the gear shift levers

while the engine is running. Unexpected tractor move-
ment can result from such contact.
5. Do not get off the tractor while it is in motion.
10. Do not run the tractor engine in an enclosed build-

6. If the power steering or engine ceases operating, ing without adequate ventilation. Exhaust fumes are
stop the tractor immediately as the tractor will be more toxic and can cause death.
difficult to control.
11. Pull only from the pick-up hitch, swinging drawbar

7. Before leaving the tractor, park the tractor on level or the lower link drawbar in the lowered position. See
ground, apply the parking brake, stop the engine, dis- page 85 in section 2. Use only a drawbar pin that locks
engage the P.T.O.and lower attached implements to in place. Pulling from the tractor rear axle or any point
the ground. above the axle may cause the tractor to overturn.
viii
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
12. Always select Position Control when attaching OPERATING THE P.T.O.
equipment and when transporting equipment. Be sure 1. When operating P.T.O.- driven equipment, shut
hydraulic couplers are properly mounted and will dis- off the engine and wait until the P.T.O. stops before
connect safely in case of accidental detachment of the getting off the tractor and disconnecting the equip-
implement. ment.
2. Do not wear loose clothing when operating the

power take-off or especially when near rotating equip-
13. If the front end of the tractor tends to rise when ment.
heavy implements are attached to the three- point
hitch, install front end or front wheel weights. Do not
3. When operating stationary P.T.O.-driven equip-
operate the tractor with a light front end.
ment, always apply the tractor parking brake and
block the rear wheels front and back.
14. Ensure any attached equipment or accessories
are correctly installed, are approved for use with the
tractor, do not overload the tractor and are operated
and maintained in accordance with the instructions is-
sued by the equipment or accessory manufacturer.
15. Remember that your tractor, if abused or incor-

rectly used, can be dangerous and become a hazard
both to the operator and to bystanders. Do not over-
load or operate with attached equipment which is un-
safe, not designed for the particular task or is poorly
maintained.
16. Do not leave equipment in the raised position

when the vehicle is stopped or unattended. 4. To avoid injury, do not clean, adjust, unclog or
service P.T.O. driven equipment when the tractor en-
17. Do not drive equipment near open fires. gine is running.
18. Always wear a protective mask when working 5. Make sure the P.T.O. guard is in position at all
with toxic spray chemicals. Follow the directions on times and always replace the P.T.O. cap when the
the chemical container. P.T.O. is not in use.
ix
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SERVICING THE TRACTOR or fuel oil under pressure can penetrate the skin caus-
ing serious injury. Unqualified persons should not re-
move or attempt to adjust a pump, injector, nozzle or
any other part of the fuel injection or hydraulic sys-
tems. Failure to follow these instructions can result in
serious injury.
• Do not use your hand to check for leaks. Use a

piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
• Stop the engine and relieve pressure before con-

necting or disconnecting lines.
1. The cooling system operates under pressure

which is controlled by the radiator cap. It is dangerous
to remove the cap while the system is hot. Always turn
the cap slowly to the first stop and allow the pressure
to escape before removing the cap entirely.
2. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor. Keep

any type of open flame away.
• Tighten all connections before starting the engine

3. Keep the tractor and equipment, particularly
or pressurising lines.
brakes and steering, maintained in a reliable and sat-
isfactory condition to ensure your safety and comply • If fluid is injected into the skin obtain medical at-
with legal requirements. tention immediately or gangrene may result.
8. Do not modify or alter or permit anyone else to

4. To prevent fire or explosion, keep open flames
modify or alter the tractor or any of its components or
away from battery or cold weather starting aids. To
any tractor function without first consulting an
prevent sparks which could cause explosion, use
authorised dealer.
jumper cables according to instructions.
9. Continuous long term contact with used engine oil

5. Do not attempt to service the air conditioning sys- may cause skin cancer. Avoid prolonged contact with
tem. It is possible to be severely frost bitten or injured used engine oil. Wash skin promptly with soap and
by escaping refrigerant. Special equipment and in- water.
struments are required to service the air conditioning
system. See your authorised dealer for service. 10. Keep equipment clean and properly maintained.
11. Dispose of all drained fluids and removed filters

6. Stop the engine before performing any service on
properly.
the tractor.
12. Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care

7. Hydraulic fluid and fuel oil in the injection system and ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple and
operate under high pressure. Escaping hydraulic fluid cause injury.
x
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
DIESEL FUEL 9. Always tighten the fuel tank cap securely.

1. Under no circumstances should gasoline, alcohol
or blended fuels be added to diesel fuel. These combi- 10. If the original fuel tank cap is lost, replace it with an
nations can create an increased fire or explosive haz- approved cap. A non- approved cap may not be safe.
ard. In a closed container such as a fuel tank these
blends are more explosive than pure gasoline. Do not 11. Never use fuel for cleaning purposes.
use these blends.
12. Arrange fuel purchases so that summer grade fu-
2. Turn the key- start switch to the OFF position be- els are not held over and used in the winter.
fore refuelling.
3. Never remove the fuel cap or refuel with the en-

gine running or hot.
SAFETY CAB
Your tractor is equipped with a safety cab which must
be maintained in a serviceable condition. Be careful
when driving through doorways or working in confined
spaces with low headroom.
1. Do not modify, drill, weld or alter the safety cab in

any way. Doing so could render you liable to legal
prosecution in some countries.
2. Never attempt to straighten or weld any part of the

main frame or retaining brackets which have suffered
damage. By doing so you may weaken the structure
4. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor or when
and endanger your safety.
standing near fuel. Keep any type of open flame away.
5. Maintain control of the fuel filler pipe nozzle when 3. Do not secure any parts on the main frame or at-
filling the tank. tach your safety cab with other than the special high
tensile bolts and nuts specified.
6. Use a proper fuel transfer pipe and nozzle when
refuelling. Ensure that the nozzle and hose are
earthed to dissipate any static electrical charge. 4. Never attach chains or ropes to the cab or main
frame for pulling purposes.
7. Do not fill the fuel tank to capacity. Allow room for

expansion. 5. Never take unnecessary risks even though your
safety cab affords you the maximum protection possi-
8. Wipe up spilled fuel immediately. ble.
Whenever you see this symbol it means: ATTENTION!

BECOME ALERT! YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED!
xi
SAFETY DECALS
The decals reproduced on the following pages were decals and their significance. Review the decals and
installed on your tractor in the positions indicated in the operating instructions detailed in this Manual with the
drawings below. They are intended for your safety and machine operators. Keep the decals clean and legible. If
for those working with you. Please take this Manual and they become damaged or illegible, obtain replacements
walk around your tractor, noting the location of the from your authorised dealer.
1 2
12 10
7
11 3
4
6 1
9 9
xii
SAFETY DECALS
86508550 86508548 86508544
1. Location: Right and left side 2. Location: Inside left- hand 3. Location: Engine air cleaner
of radiator support engine access door support on the right- hand side,
To prevent serious injury, keep Fluid under high pressure! To avoid above the alternator
hands and clothing away from rotat- eye injury, refer to Workshop Manu- Warranty on the engine and/or
ing fan and drive belt. al before disconnecting lines. Wear power train components shall not
safety goggles. Refrigerant charge apply when failure results from un-
is 5.0 lbf. (2.3 kg) of R-134a. specified adjustments of the fuel in-
jection system.
86508549 86508545 86508546
4. Location: Starter motor 5. Location: Radar sensor 6. Location: Front of right- hand
To avoid injury due to tractor move- mounting bracket side console
ment, disengage transmission and To avoid possible eye damage from To avoid injury due to tractor move-
engage parking brake before by- micro-wave signals emitted by the ment, do not grasp transmission
passing safety start switch or start- radar sensor, do not look directly controls unless correctly seated.
er solenoid or before attaching bat- into the sensor face. Use handrails to enter or exit from
tery jump leads. the cab.
xiii
SAFETY DECALS
86511860 86508544 86508544
7. Location: Top of right- 8. Location: Below PTO 11. Location: Right-hand

hand side console output shaft ‘B’ pillar, inside cab
Always engage the parking Failure to follow these General warning. Read and
brake before exiting the trac- instructions can result in seri- understand all the warning
tor. The transmission will not ous operator or bystander in- notes printed in this Opera-
prevent the tractor from rolling jury. tor’s Manual. In particular,
when the engine is shut off. • Pull only from the drawbar see pages v to xi inclusive.
or tow hitch. Pulling from any
other point can cause the
tractor to overturn rearwards.
• Stop the PTO and engine
before servicing the tractor or
changing implements.
• Do not operate with an
unshielded PTO.
• Use safety chains when
towing equipment.
• Position drawbar at 16 in.
(406 mm) from end of 1000
rev/min PTO shaft to drawbar
hole when using 1.375 in.
(34.9 mm) shaft and 20 in.
(508 mm) with 1.75 in. (44.5
mm) shaft.
WARNING
IF TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT
AND ALARM OPERATE.
IMMEDIATELY
1. DOWNSHIFT TO 7th GEAR OR BELOW
2. PROCEED TO SAFE STOPPING AREA AND PARK
86508547 DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DRIVE FURTHER WITH ALARM

OPERATING.
82001827
9. Location: Rear of both WHEN ALARM STOPS, PROCEED WITH CAUTION IN A
fenders 10. Location: Left- hand LOW GEAR. CONTACT YOUR DEALER WITHOUT DELAY.
To avoid injury, do not stand ‘B’ pillar inside the cab
on the implement or between In an overturn, hold on 12. Location: Right-hand Window
the implement and tractor tightly to the steering
while operating the external wheel. Do not attempt to Procedure to be followed in event of
lift controls. jump out. transmission overheat warning.
xiv
UNIVERSAL SYMBOLS
As a guide to the operation of your tractor, various uni- controls, switches, and fuse box. The symbols are
versal symbols have been utilised on the instruments, shown below with an indication of their meaning.
xv
Thermostart Position
Horn P.T.O.
starting aid Control
Alternator Transmission Draft

Radio
charge in neutral Control
Keep alive Creeper Accessory

Fuel level
memory gears socket
Automatic Turn signals Slow or Implement

Fuel shut-off low setting socket
Engine speed Turn signals Fast or high Hitch dis-

(rev/min x 100) - one trailer setting abled
Turn signals Ground %age

Hours recorded - two trailers speed slip
Front wind- Pressurised!

Engine oil Differential
screen Open care-
pressure lock
wash/wipe fully
Rear wind- Rear axle
Engine coolant oil tem-
screen Hitch raise
temperature perature
wash/wipe
Heater temp- Transmission

Tractor lights erature control Hitch lower
oil pressure
Headlamp Heater fan FWD Hitch

main beam engaged height limit
FWD dis- Hydraulic and

Headlamp Air conditioner
engaged transmission
dipped beam
filters
Stop Remote
lamps Air filter Warning!
valve extend
Front work Parking Hazard

lamps brake warning lights Remote
valve retract
Rear work Roof Warning!

Remote
lamps beacon Corrosive
valve float
substance
Malfunction!
Coolant Intercooler Variable See Operator’s
level temperature control Manual
xvi
AIRBORNE NOISE EMISSION
In accordance with E.E.C. directives, the noise levels of tractors covered by this Manual are as follows:
Maximum noise level (off load)* 73 dB(A) - all models
* Test results are in accordance with directive 77/311/EEC Annex II. Maximum noise level at operator’s ear with
cab windows closed, tractor off load.
xvii
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared to assist you in the
correct procedure for running-in, driving, operating
and maintaining your tractor.
The manual is divided into five sections as detailed in

the ‘Contents’ page. A comprehensive index is pro-
vided at the back of the manual.
Read this manual carefully and keep it, for future

reference, in the compartment (1) Figure 7, attached
to the rear of the seat. If at any time you require advice 7
concerning your tractor, do not hesitate to contact
your authorised dealer. He has factory-trained
personnel, genuine replacement parts, and the
necessary equipment to carry out your service
requirements.
Your tractor has been designed and built to give

maximum performance, economy and ease of
operation under a wide variety of operating
conditions. Prior to delivery, the tractor was carefully
inspected, both at the factory and by your dealer, to
ensure that it reaches you in optimum condition. To
Company policy is one of continuous improvement
maintain this condition and ensure trouble-free
and the right to change prices, specifications or
operation, it is important that the routine services, as
equipment at any time, without notice, is reserved.
specified in this manual, are carried out at the
recommended intervals.
References to the right and left sides of the tractor are
determined by sitting in the operator’s seat facing the
direction of forward travel.
All data given in this book is subject to production vari-
ations. Dimensions and weights are approximate The ‘Safety Precautions’ pages in the introductory
only, and the illustrations do not necessarily show section list the precautions to be observed to ensure
tractors in standard condition. For exact information your safety and the safety of others. Read the safety
about any particular tractor, please consult your au- precautions carefully and follow the advice offered
thorised dealer. before operating the tractor.
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
PROTECTIVE GUARDS
Protective guards have been installed on your tractor.
The guards are intended for your safety and for those
working with you.
CAUTION: Install all protective guards be-

fore starting or operating the tractor.
ENGINE HOOD - Figure 8

The hood (1) covers the engine’s moving parts. The 8
hood must be closed before operating the tractor.
FAN GUARD - Figure 9

A guard (1) is provided to cover both sides of the
engine cooling fan. The illustration shows the guard
on the left- hand side of the tractor.
ENGINE ACCESS DOOR - Figure 10

As an aid to service, a door (1) is provided for access
to the rear of both sides of the engine. The illustration
shows the access door on the left- hand side of the
tractor.
10
2
SECTION 1
STARTER SOLENOID GUARD - Figure 11

The guard (1) covers the starter solenoid electrical
connections to prevent accidental contact. The guard
must be installed whenever the batteries are con-
nected to the electrical system.
11
BATTERY COVER - Figure 12

The cover (1) protects the batteries from damage and
the electrical connections from accidental contact.
12
P.T.O. GUARD - Figure 13

The guard (1) covers the P.T.O. shaft. The guard can
be pivoted upwards to improve access to the P.T.O.
shaft .
CAUTION: Do not remove or modify the

guard.
13
3
GENERAL INFORMATION
P.T.O. CAP - Figure 14

Install the cap (1) over the tractor PTO shaft when the
shaft is not attached to an implement. Turn the cap
anti- clockwise to remove, and clockwise to install.
Store the cap in the tractor toolbox when removed.
CAUTION: Install all protective shields be-

fore starting or moving the tractor.
14
CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS - LOCATION AND FUNCTION

The information on the following pages identifies, 4. Right-hand console controls
locates and briefly describes the function of the
controls and instruments located in the cab.
IMPORTANT: The following information in this
section provides a general overview of location and
The controls have been divided into the following four function but does not provide detailed operational
areas: information. Thoroughly read Section 2 -
‘OPERATION’ for details on how to use the controls
and check the instruments and warning lights before
1. Instrument console controls
operating the tractor.
2. Foot and floor controls

CAUTION: Do not operate the tractor until
you are thoroughly accustomed with the
3. Overhead controls location and operation of all controls.
4
SECTION 1
INSTRUMENT CONSOLE CONTROLS
15 Instrument Console Controls

1 Key-start/stop switch (4 position) 7 Multi-function switch - horn, turn signal, high/low beam
2 Engine shutdown override switch 8 Roof beacon switch (where fitted)
3 Creeper switch (where fitted) 9 Hazard warning switch
4 Steering column tilt control lever 10 Master light switch (4 position)
5 Steering column telescopic adjustment control knob 11 Electronic instrument cluster (E.I.C.)
6 Thermostart switch
Each of the numbered items shown in Figure 15 is discussed under the corresponding heading found on the
following pages.
5
GENERAL INFORMATION
KEY-START/STOP SWITCH - (1) Figure 16

The key start/stop rotary switch has four positions.
Position A Accessories ON, engine OFF

Position B Engine and electrical equipment OFF
Position C Warning lights and instruments ON.
(engine RUN position.)
Position D Starter motor operates
ENGINE SHUTDOWN OVERRIDE SWITCH

(where fitted) - (2) Figure 16
The two-position rocker switch allows the operator to 16
over ride the automatic shutdown. The switch should
only be used to move the tractor to a safe area for in-
vestigation and repair. Press the top of the switch to
override the shutdown system. Press the bottom to
return to normal automatic shutdown operation. See
‘Operating the Engine’ for details.
CREEPER SWITCH (where fitted) - (3) Figure 16

The switch controls the engagement of the creeper
gears. Press the top of the switch to select creeper.
Press the bottom of the switch to return to normal op-
eration. Do not select creeper unless the tractor has
come to a complete stop. See ‘Transmission Opera-
tion’ for details.
Tractors without creeper will have a blanking plate in

place of the switch.
STEERING COLUMN TILT CONTROL LEVER -

(4) Figure 17
Pulling on the lever allows the steering column to be
tilted up or down to a comfortable operating position
or out of the way for easy exit from the seat. See ‘Cab’
for details.
STEERING COLUMN TELESCOPE

ADJUSTMENT KNOB - (5) Figure 17
Rotating the knob allows the steering column to be
shortened or lengthened (telescoped) to a comfort-
able operating position. See ‘Cab’ for details. 17
6
SECTION 1
COLD START (THERMOSTART) SWITCH - (6)

Figure 18
Depressing the switch activates the Thermostart sys-
tem. See ‘Cold Weather Starting’ for details.
MULTI- FUNCTION SWITCH - (7) Figure 18

The stalk-type switch operates the horn, turn signals,
headlight flash and is also used to select high or low
beam. See ‘Lights and Accessory Power’ for details.
18
ROOF BEACON SWITCH (where fitted) (8) -

Figure 19
The switch controls the operation of the roof-mounted
beacon. Press the top of the switch to operate the
beacon. Press the bottom of the switch to turn off. See
‘Lights and Accessory Power’ for details.
HAZARD WARNING LIGHT SWITCH - (9) -

Figure 19
Push the top of the switch to activate the hazard warn-
ing lights. Push the bottom of the switch to turn the
hazard lights off. See ‘Lights and Accessory Power’
for details.
MASTER LIGHTS SWITCH - (10) - Figure 19

The master lights switch has 4 positions:
A = (Fully clockwise) is off
B = Parking lights
19
C = Headlights and parking lights
D = Work lights, headlights and parking lights. The

work lights are selected by using the touch- sensitive
switches on the E.I.C. console. See ‘Lights and Ac-
cessory Power’ for details.
7
GENERAL INFORMATION
ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (EIC)
1 2
PRG
ALTERNATOR INTERCOOLER TRANS PRESS TRANS TEMP
COOL LEVEL FILTERS
COLD START PTO ON
AIR FILTER
UP- SHIFT
TRAILER BRAKE
DOWN- SHIFT
1 AUTO
TRAILER GEAR FWD
8 2 AUTO 3
FUEL LEVEL ENGINE OIL PRESS COOLANT TEMP EXHAUST TEMP
n/min RPM
AREA/HR SPEED
4 4 3
7 4
AREA PTO RPM
2
3 1
1
SLIP ENG HR
2 VOLTS
SET UP START
1 PANEL DIM SYSTEM STATUS P SELECT STOP
E/M
6 5
20 Electronic Instrument Cluster

1 Liquid crystal displays (LCD) (3) 5 Touch-sensitive programme switches (11)
2 Indicator lamps (18) 6 Indicator lamps (3)
3 Bargraphs (2) 7 Touch-sensitive control switches (5)
4 Tractor Performance Monitor (TPM) 8 Bargraphs (2)
The central Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) (1) has Eleven touch-sensitive switches (5) select different
transmission gear information at the top. Engine EIC functions and aid in calibration.
speed appears in the middle display. The bottom sec-
tion displays hours, ground speed or PTO speed, as Three indicator lamps (6) are located in the centre of
selected.
the lower panel.
The top section (2) of the EIC consists of 18 indicator

Five touch-sensitive switches (7) select the various
lamps.
work lights and the dimmer control.
Bargraphs (3) indicate coolant temperature and ex-

haust temperature. Bargraphs (8) indicate fuel level and oil pressure.
The right panel (4) contains the Tractor Performance See ‘Electronic Instrument Cluster’ in Section 2 for
Monitor (TPM). details.
8
SECTION 1
FOOT AND FLOOR- MOUNTED CONTROLS
21 Foot and Floor- mounted Controls

1 Parking brake 4. Brake locking plate
2 Inching pedal 5 Right wheel foot brake pedal
3 Left wheel foot brake pedal 6 Foot throttle
Each of the numbered items shown in Figure 21 is discussed under the corresponding heading below and on the
following page.
PARKING BRAKE - (1) Figure 21 INCHING PEDAL - (2) Figure 21

The parking brake uses a conventional lever to oper- The inching pedal is installed in place of the clutch
ate brake discs located on the differential input shaft. pedal found on tractors with conventional transmis-
The lever is located to the left of the driver’s seat. sions.
The inching pedal operates like a clutch, for safe, ac-

See ‘Brakes’ for details. curate positioning of the tractor when attaching imple-
ments or when operating in confined spaces, etc. De-
pressing the pedal interrupts the power flow from the
NOTE: To remind the operator to apply the parking engine to the rear axle. Slowly releasing the pedal re-
brake, 2-minute pulsating audible alarm will sound in stores the power flow.
unison with a flashing parking brake lamp if the opera-
tor leaves the seat without applying the parking brake. See ‘Transmission’ for details.
9
GENERAL INFORMATION
22 Foot and Floor- mounted Controls
FOOT BRAKE PEDALS - (3 and 5) Figure 22 BRAKE LOCKING PLATE - (4) Figure 22
The foot brakes may be operated independently, to To lock the brake pedals together, position the locking
aid turning in confined spaces, or together for normal plate so it engages the slot in the right foot pedal as
stopping. When operating in the field it is shown. See ‘Brakes’ for details.
recommended that the brake pedals be unlocked.
FOOT THROTTLE - (6) Figure 22

See ‘Brakes’ for details. The foot throttle controls engine speed. It may be
used independently of the hand throttle to control en-
gine speed and is recommended for use when travel-
ling on the highway.
CAUTION: Always lock the brakes together

when traveling on the highway, or if a hydrau-
lically braked trailer is attached. Never use the brakes NOTE: Whenever the foot throttle is to be used, set
to aid turning at high speed. the hand throttle to the idle position.
10
SECTION 1
OVERHEAD CONTROLS
23 Roof- mounted Controls
1 Air conditioner activation switch 6 Rear window wiper/washer switch (where fitted)
2 Temperature control switch 7 Cigar lighter
3 Pressuriser fan speed switch 8 Control console illumination lights (2)
4. Adjustable air vents (6) 9 Interior lights (2)
5 Front windshield wiper/washer switch 10 Interior rearview mirror
Each of the numbered items shown in Figure 23 is discussed under the corresponding heading found below and
on the following pages.
AIR CONDITIONER ACTIVATION SWITCH - (1)

Figure 24
The switch controls the activation of the air
conditioner. See ‘Cab’ for details.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH - (2)

Figure 24
Rotate the knob clockwise for increased heat and
anti- clockwise for less heat and maximum cooling
when the air conditioning is activated. See ‘Cab’ for
details.
PRESSURISER FAN SWITCH - (3) Figure 24

The pressuriser fan switch has three positions. Low
speed is fully anti- clockwise. Rotate the switch clock-
wise for medium and high speeds. See ‘Cab’ for de-
tails. 24
11
GENERAL INFORMATION
ADJUSTABLE AIR VENTS - (4) Figure 25

The vents direct pressurised air inside the cab.
Rotate the vents inside their housings to direct air as
required. See ‘Cab’ for details.
WARNING: The cab air filter is designed to

remove dust from the air. When using
chemicals, follow the chemical manufacturer’s
recommendations regarding protection from
dangerous chemicals.
25
FRONT WINDSCREEN WIPE/WASH SWITCH - (5)
Figure 26
The windscreen wiper rotary switch has three posi-
tions - off, slow, and fast. Push the knob in to operate
the washer. See ‘Cab’ for details.
REAR WINDOW WIPE/WASH SWITCH - (6)

Figure 26
The rear window wipe/wash switch has two positions
- off and on. Push the knob in to activate the washer.
See ‘Cab’ for details.
CIGAR LIGHTER - (7) Figure 26

Push the lighter in until it latches. When it pops out, re-
move it from its socket and return after use. 26
CONTROL CONSOLE ILLUMINATION - (8)

Figure 27
The two lamps are activated when the master lights
switch is on. The lights illuminate the cab controls.
INTERIOR LIGHTS - (9) Figure 27

The lights illuminate the cab interior. Each light switch
can be set to one of three positions. See ‘Lights and
Accessory Power’ for details.
INTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR - (10) Figure 27

Adjust the mirror for best rearward view. 27
12
SECTION 1
RIGHT- HAND CONSOLE CONTROLS
28 Right- hand Console Controls
1 Hand throttle control 10 PTO engagement switch

2 Powershift transmission control lever and neutral 11 PTO status light
latch 12 3-point hitch lift control and adjustable stop
3 Four wheel drive switch (where fitted) 13 3-point hitch draft/position control knob
4 Transmission automatic shift switch 14 3-point hitch rate of drop control knob
5 Differential lock switch 15 3-point hitch height limit control knob
6 Transmission up/down shift switch 16 3-point hitch % slip override control knob and indica-
7 3-point hitch fast raise/work switch tor light (where fitted)
8 Remote valve hydraulic control levers 17 3-point hitch operation status lamp
9 Rotary lock gates 18 Right-hand console position switch
Each of the numbered items shown in Figure 28 is discussed under the corresponding heading found on the fol-
lowing pages.
13
GENERAL INFORMATION
HAND THROTTLE LEVER - (1) Figure 29

The lever controls engine speed. Push forward to pro-
gressively increase engine speed. Pull rearward to
reduce engine speed.
POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION CONTROL

LEVER (with neutral lock) - (2) Figure 29
The Powershift transmission control lever is used to
select forward or reverse travel and to change trans-
mission speeds. Move the lever forward for forward
travel and rearward for reverse travel.
29
NOTE: A neutral-lock feature is fitted. The control
lever may only be moved to the forward or reverse
positions if the neutral-lock latch on the control lever
knob is depressed. Neutral may be selected without
depressing the neutral-lock latch.
The Powershift transmission control lever is also

used to make instantaneous upward or downward
speed changes. Nudge the lever to the right for up-
ward changes and to the left for downward changes.
In this context, ‘nudge’ means move the lever and
then release.
See ‘Transmission Operation’ for details.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SWITCH - (3) Figure 30

Four-wheel drive engagement is controlled by a
three-position rocker switch. From off, press the front
of the switch to the first position to engage AUTO
FWD. In this position the FWD will disengage at
speeds above 15 MPH (24 km/h) or when one brake
is used to assist turning. Press to the full forward posi-
tion to engage ON which will keep the FWD engaged
below 15 MPH (24 km/h). See ‘Four Wheel Drive Op-
eration’ for details.
TRANSMISSION AUTO SHIFT SWITCH - (4)

Figure 30
The switch controls automatic speed shifting through
gears 10 - 18. Depress to engage auto shift, depress
again to disengage. See ‘Transmission Operation’ for
details. 30
14
SECTION 1
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SWITCH - (5) Figure 31

The switch controls the engagement of the
electro-hydraulic, self-holding differential lock. Press
the front (orange) part of the switch to lock the rear
wheels together.
To disengage the differential lock, momentarily

depress the rear part of the switch once. The lock will
remain engaged until traction at the rear wheels
equalises, until either of the foot brakes is applied or if
ground speed exceeds 10 MPH (16 km/h).
If the front of the switch is pressed twice within one 31

second, the AUTO mode will be selected. In this mode
the differential lock will disengage when the 3- point
hitch fast raise/work switch is activated to raise the
3- point linkage and automatically re- engage when
the 3- point linkage is lowered. See ‘Differential Lock’
for details.
NOTE: In the AUTO mode, the differential lock will

disengage and re-engage if either foot brake is
applied and then released. The differential lock will
permanently disengage when ground speed
exceeds 10 MPH (16 km/h).
TRANSMISSION UP/DOWN SHIFT SWITCH - (6)

Figure 32
Depressing the front of the switch will allow an
increase of 1, 2 or 3 gear ratios depending on how the
transmission is programmed. Pressing the rear of the
switch will reduce speeds by 1, 2 or 3 gear ratios. See
‘Transmission Operation’ for details.
3-POINT HITCH FAST RAISE/WORK SWITCH -

(7) Figure 32
Depressing the rear of the switch will fast raise the
3-point hitch and implement for quick turns at the end
of the field. Depressing the front of the switch drops
the implement to its original position.
The fast raise/work switch is also used to recapture

the hitch after using the external fender switches. See
‘3-Point Hitch Controls’ for details. 32
15
GENERAL INFORMATION
REMOTE HYDRAULIC VALVE CONTROL

LEVERS - (8) Figure 33
Each lever controls a four-position remote valve.
From neutral pull the lever rearward to the stop for
raise. Push forward one position at a time for neutral,
lower and float. See ‘Remote-Control Valves’ for de-
tails.
ROTARY LOCKOUT GATES - (9) Figure 33

Each remote-valve control lever has a four-position
lockout gate. The lockout gate can be positioned to
prevent or limit lever movement. See ‘Remote Control
Valves’ for details.
33
P.T.O. ENGAGEMENT SWITCH - (10) Figure 33

Depress the button in the centre of the switch then pull
upwards on the knob to engage the P.T.O. To disen-
gage the P.T.O., push the knob down. See ‘P.T.O. Op-
eration’ for details.
P.T.O. STATUS LIGHT - (11) Figure 33

The P.T.O. status light will illuminate when the P.T.O.
is activated. See ‘P.T.O. Operation’ for details.
3-POINT HITCH LIFT CONTROL LEVERS - (12)

Figure 34
To raise the 3-point hitch, move the lift control lever
rearwards. Moving the lever forward will lower the
3-point hitch. A digital readout of hitch height position
from 0 to 99 will be displayed on the EIC. See ‘3-Point
Hitch Controls’ for details.
3-POINT HITCH POSITION/DRAFT CONTROL -

(13) Figure 34
The position/draft sensitivity control knob selects
position control, maximum draft control or a mixture of
the two.
Rotate clockwise for full draft control and anti- clock-

wise for full position control. Varying sensitivity will be
achieved in the mid positions. See ‘3-Point Hitch Con-
trols” for details.
3-POINT HITCH RATE OF DROP CONTROL - (14)

Figure 35
The rate of drop control is provided to limit the rate of
drop of the 3-point linkage. 34
16
SECTION 1
Rotate the knob clockwise to speed up the drop rate

and anti-clockwise to slow the rate of drop. See
‘3-Point Hitch Controls’ for details.
3-POINT HITCH HEIGHT LIMIT CONTROL - (15)

Figure 35
The height limit control limits the maximum height to
which the lift arms can be raised to prevent large im-
plements from striking the rear of the cab.
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase hitch height.

See ‘3-Point Hitch Controls’ for details.
3-POINT HITCH SLIP CONTROL - (16) Figure 36

The slip control limits the amount of rear wheel slip.
Rotate the knob to indicate the slip rate above which 35
override should occur. The 3-point hitch will raise until
the slip rate drops below the override setting, then the
hitch will return to its original position. See ‘3-Point
Hitch Controls’ for details.
3-POINT HITCH STATUS LIGHT - (17) Figure 36

This lamp will be illuminated whenever the 3-point
hitch lift control lever and lift arms are not in phase.
The hitch must be ‘captured’ to regain control.
If the lamp is flashing, there is a malfunction in the

electronic 3-point hitch control circuit. See ‘3-Point
Hitch Controls’. 36
17
GENERAL INFORMATION
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE POSITION SWITCH -

(18) Figure 37
Use the switch to move the console fore and aft to suit
the operator’s seat position.
Press the front of the switch to move the console for-

ward. Press the rear of the switch to move the console
to the rear. See ‘Cab’ for details.
37
PROTECTING THE ELECTRONIC/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DURING

CHARGING OR WELDING
PRECAUTIONS • If welding is to be carried out in close proximity to a
To avoid damage to the electronic/electrical systems, computer module, then the module should be re-
always observe the following: moved from the tractor. It is recommended that this
procedure be carried out by an authorised dealer.
1. Never make or break any of the charging circuit

connections, including the battery connections, when • Never allow welding cables to lay on, near or
the engine is running. across any electrical wiring or electronic compo-
nent while welding is in progress.
2. Never short any of the charging components to

earth.
6. Always disconnect the negative cable from the
batteries when charging the batteries in the tractor
3. Do not use a slave battery of higher than 12 volts with a battery charger.
nominal voltage.
4. Always observe correct polarity when installing WARNING: Batteries contain sulphuric acid.
the batteries or using a slave battery to jump start the In case of contact with skin, flush the affected
engine. Follow the instructions in the operator’s area with water for five minutes. Seek medical atten-
manual when jump starting the tractor. Connect position immediately. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
tive to positive and negative to negative. clothing. Wear eye protection when working near bat-
teries.
5. Always disconnect the earth cable from the bat-

teries before carrying out arc welding on the tractor or
IMPORTANT: Failure to disconnect the two earth
on any implement attached to the tractor.
cable connections at the battery prior to charging the
batteries or welding on the tractor or attached imple-
• Position the welder earth cable clamp as close to ment will result in damage to the electronic and elec-
the welding area as possible. trical systems.
18
SECTION 1
DISCONNECTING THE NEGATIVE BATTERY

CABLE - Figures 38 and 39
To disconnect the negative battery cable connec-
tions:
1. Remove the three battery cover attaching bolts

(1) Figure 38.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector (2).

38
3. Remove the battery cover (3).
4. Disconnect the two negative earth cable connec-

tions (1) from the batteries. See Figure 39.
After completing battery charging or welding,

re-install the negative cable connections and battery
cover. 39
TOWING THE TRACTOR

TRACTOR TOWING - Figure 40
IMPORTANT: The tractor should only be towed a
short distance, such as out of a building. Do not tow on
roadways or as a method of transport.
IMPORTANT: For transport purposes, haul the tractor

with all four wheels on a flat bed trailer or truck.
Use a strong chain when towing the tractor. Tow the

tractor from the rear using only the drawbar, rear tow
hitch or the three-point hitch. Tow the tractor from the
front using both tie down brackets (1) or the tow pin
(2) in the front weight support. Have an operator steer
and brake the tractor.
19
GENERAL INFORMATION
• Keep speed below 5 MPH (8 km/h)
• If possible, run the engine to provide lubrication,

power steering and power brakes.
CAUTION: Do not tow the tractor faster than

5 MPH (8 km/h). Steering is much slower and
steering wheel effort is much greater without the en-
gine running.
WARNING: Do not use cables or rope to tow

the tractor. If the cable or rope breaks or slips,
it may whip with sufficient force to cause serious inju-
ry.
40 When using a chain, attach the chain with the hook

open side facing up. If the hook slips, it will drop down
To avoid damaging the transmission or other compo- instead of flying up.
nents that turn but are not lubricated during towing,
observe the following: NOTE: Four wheel drive will be engaged if the engine
is not running, regardless of the position of the FWD
• Only tow a short distance activation switch.
CARRYING THE TRACTOR ON A TRANSPORTER

TRACTOR TRANSPORT or other components that could be damaged by con-
Transport the tractor with all four wheels on a flat bed tacting the chain or by heavy loading.
trailer or truck.
Use the drawbar or drawbar hanger for a rear tie
down point.
Securely chain the tractor to the transporter.
IMPORTANT: Cover the silencer outlet so that the
Tie down brackets (1) Figure 40, are provided on the wind does not spin the turbocharger and damage the
front of the tractor. bearings.
Turbocharger turbine freewheeling (turning without

IMPORTANT: Do not chain around the four wheel engine running) must be avoided since lubrication will
drive shaft, steering cylinders, front wheel drive axle not be provided to the turbocharger bearings.
PRE-OPERATION CHECKS
Before operating the tractor, ensure that you are thor- After completing the daily maintenance operations,
oughly familiar with the location and operation of the perform a walk around visual inspection of the tractor.
controls. Pay particular attention to the following items:
• Fan belt for cracks

Perform all daily lubrication and maintenance opera-
tions in accordance with Section 3. • Engine area for accumulation of debris
20
SECTION 1
• Hoses, lines and fittings for leaks or damage.
• Tyres for damage
• Hardware for looseness
• Driveline and hydraulic pump areas for leaks or

debris accumulation
Make any necessary repairs before using the tractor.
21
SECTION 2
OPERATION
BEFORE OPERATING
Read this section thoroughly. It details the location moving. If in doubt about any aspect of operation of
and operation of the various instruments, switches the tractor, consult your authorised dealer.
and controls on your tractor. Even if you operate other
tractors, you should thoroughly read this section of
Pay particular attention to the recommendations for
the manual and be sure that you are familiar with the
breaking-in to ensure that your tractor will give the
location and function of all the features of the tractor.
long and dependable service for which it was
designed.
Do not start the engine or attempt to drive or operate See Section 3 for lubrication and maintenance
the tractor until you are fully accustomed to all the requirements. Tractor specifications are listed in
controls. It is too late to learn once the tractor is Section 5.
1
OPERATION
CAB
INTRODUCTION
The cab has been designed for operator comfort and
convenience. Inside, the walls, roof, and floor are
insulated to reduce noise to a minimum.
Standard features include two fully glazed doors,

fresh air heater/defroster, air-conditioning, tinted
glass, interior lights, grab handles, cigar lighter,
ashtray, storage box and an air suspension seat.
1
ENTERING THE CAB - Figure 1

The cab may be entered from the right or left side.
To enter the cab, face a door (1) then open it.
Place one foot on the lowest step plate (4) and, using
the grab handles (2) and (3) on the ‘A’ post and inside
the door, climb the steps and enter the cab. Close the
door, sit in the seat and fasten the seat belt, if fitted.
To exit the cab, release the seat belt, open the door,
grasp the grab handles, back out of the cab and
descend the steps using the grab handles.
2
EXTERNAL DOOR HANDLE - Figure 2

Each door has an external handle (1) with a push
button (2). The door may be locked from the outside
using the key provided. Insert the key in the slot in the
push button. Rotate the key to lock or unlock the door.
To open a door from the outside, push the button in

and pull on the handle.
INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE - Figure 3

To open a door from the inside, pull the door handle
(1) rearwards then push on the grab handle (2). The
doors are rear-hinged and are retained in the fully
open position by gas struts. 3
2
SECTION 2
RIGHT-HAND WINDOW- Figure 4

The window can be locked in the closed position (1),
the partially open position (2) or fully open (3).
To lock the window in the closed position, pull the

handle in and forward in an arc until the mechanism
locks.
To partially open the window, pull the handle in an arc

to the mid-position.
To fully open the window, push the handle out in an arc

until it locks.
REAR WINDOW - Figure 5

To open the window, lift the locking handle (1) up to
the vertical position. Two gas-filled struts will swing
the window out and retain it in the open position.
NOTE: When opening the window, ensure that it does

not strike equipment attached to the tractor.
To close the window, pull on the handle or side rails

that are provided. Push the locking handle down to
lock the window.
5
NOTE: A sensor in the seat detects when an operator

OPERATOR’S SEAT is seated. If the operator leaves the seat without
The seat has an electrically controlled pneumatic applying the parking brake, an audible alarm will
suspension and is adjustable for personal comfort. sound for a maximum of two minutes until the
Each numbered control is discussed under the operator returns to the seat or applies the parking
corresponding heading found on the following pages: brake. The sensor also actuates the audible alarm for
5 seconds if the operator leaves the seat with the PTO
engaged.
NOTE: Before operating the tractor, it is important to
adjust the seat, steering wheel and controls to the NOTE: All adjustments should be made in the
most comfortable position. following order while sitting in the seat:
3
OPERATION
1. Height/Weight Adjustment - Figure 6

Raise or lower the seat as follows with the key switch
in the ‘on’ position.
Raise - Depress the top of the switch. Release when

the desired height is obtained.
Lower - Depress the bottom of the switch. Release

when the desired height is achieved.
2. Backrest Angle Adjustment - Figure 6

Lift the control and tilt the backrest to the desired
6
position. Release the control to lock the backrest in
position.
NOTE: The backrest can tilt backward far enough to

contact the rear window.
3. Fore/Aft Position Adjustment - Figure 6

Pull up on the handle and move the seat fore/aft 6. Lumbar Adjustment - Figure 6
through the 7 in. (178 mm) adjustment range to the To increase lumbar support - Turn the knob clock-
desired position. Release the handle to lock the seat wise.
in position.
To decrease lumbar support - Turn the knob anti-
clockwise.
4. Fore/Aft Isolator Engagement - Figure 6
After selecting the desired fore/aft position, the seat
can be held stationary or allowed spring-controlled 7. Armrest Angle Adjustment - Figure 6
fore/aft movement within the 2 in. (50 mm) limit of the Rotate the knurled wheel on each armrest to adjust to
isolator’s travel. the desired angle.
Adjust as follows:
8. Left Armrest Height Adjustment - Figure 6
Isolate - Pull up on the handle. The left side armrest can be positioned level with the
seat cushion or in four height positions. To adjust:
Lock-out - Push down on the handle while slowly
moving the seat fore and aft. The handle will drop into • Lift the front of the armrest to the end of travel
place and the seat will not move when the lock-out (past vertical).
position is selected.
• Lower the armrest until it is level with the seat
cushion.
5. Damper Adjustment - Figure 6
• Raise the armrest vertically to obtain three further
The firmness of the ride can be adjusted as follows:
height positions.
Soft - Rotate the control rearward (clockwise).

9. Swivel Adjustment - Figure 6
Firm - Rotate the control forward (anti-clockwise). The seat can be adjusted to:
4
SECTION 2
• Lock in one position to the left of centre.
• Lock in one of four positions to the right of centre

(increments of 7° for a total of 28° rotation).
• Provide a free swing position.
To adjust the swing:
• Move the swivel control handle partially rearward.
• Swing the seat to the desired position.
• Release the handle to lock the seat in position.
NOTE: Moving the control handle fully rearward will

provide the free swing position.
SEAT BELT (where fitted) - Figure 7

CAUTION: Your tractor may be equipped
with a retractable seat belt. Always use the
seat belt, where fitted.
The seat belt automatically adjusts for the size of the

individual in the seat and retracts when not in use.
To fasten the belt, pull the belt from the reel and push
the tongue (1) into the buckle end (2) until a ‘click’
indicates that it is properly engaged. To release the 7
belt, push the red release button (3) on the buckle and
remove the tongue from the buckle.
The belt may be sponged with clean, soapy water. Do

not use solvents, bleach or dye on the belt as these
chemicals will weaken the webbing. Replace the belt
when it shows signs of fraying, damage or general
wear.
STEERING WHEEL
The steering column may be tilted and telescoped to
provide a comfortable operating position, as follows:
Tilt Control - Figure 8

Pulling the tilt control lever (1) allows the steering
wheel (2) to be tilted to a comfortable position. The
steering wheel can be tilted upward to the top stop to
allow easy entry to and exit from the cab. 8
5
OPERATION
Telescopic Adjustment - Figure 9

Rotating the centre locking knob (1) anti-clockwise, will
unlock the steering column so the steering wheel (2)
can be moved in or out (telescoped) to a comfortable
position. Turn the knob clockwise to lock in position.
IMPORTANT: Your tractor is equipped with hydro-

static power steering. Never hold the steering wheel
against either of the steering stops for more than 10
seconds or for more than a total of 10 seconds in any
one minute. Failure to observe this precaution may
result in damage to the steering system components.
9
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE - Figure 10
The console can be moved fully forward (1), fully
rearwards (2) or stopped anywhere in between, as
convenient.
NOTE: As the console moves rearwards, the front of

the console will move away from the seat. This
provides additional leg room when the seat is
swivelled to the right.
Press and hold the front of the console control switch

(3) to move the console forward. Release the switch
when the desired position is obtained or when the
console reaches the limit of forward travel.
Press and hold the rear of the switch for rearward

movement. Release the switch at the desired position
or at the end of rearward travel.
10
OVERHEAD CONTROLS
Air Conditioner - Figure 11

Depress the air conditioning switch (1) to activate the
air conditioner. The switch will stay in. Depress the
switch a second time to de-activate the air condition-
er. The switch will pop out.
IMPORTANT: The air conditioning system uses

R134A refrigerant. Do not mix with other refrigerants.
The temperature control switch (2) is used to maintain

a constant temperature. Rotate the temperature
control switch anti-clockwise (towards the blue sec-
tor) to lower the temperature in the cab. Adjust the
pressuriser fan speed switch (3) to increase or
decrease air flow. 11
6
SECTION 2
To aid in defrosting the windscreen and side windows,

the air conditioner and heater may be operated
together. The air conditioner will remove moisture
from the air while the heater warms the air in the cab.
When the windows are clear, de-activate the air
conditioner.
IMPORTANT: Always turn the air conditioner off when

cooled or dehumidified air is not required. This is
especially important during cold weather as damage
to the compressor could result. For proper air
conditioner operation, the cab air filter must be
serviced regularly.
Heater - Figure 12
Make sure the air conditioner is de-activated except
when required during defrosting. The switch (1)
should be in the extended position, as shown, when
the air conditioner is off.
To increase the cab interior temperature for cold

weather operation, start the engine and make sure
the coolant temperature bar graph indicates two or
more bars. Rotate the temperature control switch (2)
clockwise (toward the red sector) for increased heat.
Adjust the pressuriser fan speed switch (3) to
increase or decrease air flow.
12
Pressuriser Fan - Figure 12

The pressuriser fan has a three-position switch (3).
Low speed is fully anti-clockwise. Rotate the switch
clockwise for medium and high speeds.
NOTE: The pressuriser fan has no off position and will

always operate in one of the three speeds when the
key switch is turned on.
Heater/Air Conditioner Vents - Figure 13

The pressuriser has adjustable and fixed vents to
direct air flow as required. Two side vents (1) are used
to defrost and clear the doors. Four additional vents
(2) face the operator. 13
7
OPERATION
Figure 14
To adjust, rotate the vents (1) and (2) inside their
housings to direct air as required. The slide lever
inside the vent can be moved from side to side to
direct air flow to the left or right.
The windscreen vent (3) is not adjustable. This vent

aids in defrosting and defogging the windscreen. The
cab recirculation vent (4) is equipped with a replace-
able filter. See Section 3 for service details.

remove dust from the air but will not exclude 14
chemical vapor. Follow the chemical manufacturer’s
directions regarding protection from dangerous
chemicals.
Front Windscreen Wipe/Wash - Figure 15

The windscreen wiper is controlled by switch (1). The
switch has three positions:
Rotate the switch fully anti-clockwise for the off

position. Rotate one notch clockwise for the slow
position. Rotate fully clockwise for the fast position.
Press the switch in to activate the washer.
Rear Window Wipe/Wash (where fitted) - Figure 15 15

An optional rear wiper/washer can be installed.
The wiper is controlled by switch (2). The switch has

two positions:
Rotate the switch fully anti-clockwise for the off

position. Rotate fully clockwise for the on position.
Press the switch in to activate the washer.
IN CAB TOOLBOX - Figure 16

A storage box with a the hinged lid (1) is located in the
rear, left-hand corner of the cab. Lift the lid to access
the storage area. The lid is retained in the closed
position by a magnetic catch. 16
8
SECTION 2
EXTERIOR TOOLBOX (dealer-installed accessory)

- Figure 17
An optional steel toolbox (1) can be mounted on the
front of the tractor.
The toolbox can be locked and is secured to the

mounting bracket (2) by an attaching pin located
inside the toolbox.
To detach the toolbox, open the toolbox lid, remove

the tray, remove the attaching pin and lift the toolbox
off the mounting bracket. 17
RADIO (dealer-installed accessory) - Figure 18

The cab is pre- wired and has two speakers installed
in the roof. A choice of radios or radio/cassette
players is available from your authorised dealer.
Operating instructions will be supplied with the set.
WARNING: Ensure the aerial is positioned

so it cannot touch overhead power lines.
NOTE: The radio will only operate with the key-start

switch in the On or Accessories position.
18
CLEANING THE CAB INTERIOR

When the soft trim material inside the cab becomes
dirty, it should be wiped clean. Dip a cloth in a warm
water/detergent solution and wring out as much of the
water as possible. Wipe the interior material with the
damp cloth. Change the water when it becomes dirty.
The rubber floor covering is designed to allow water

to flow out through the open doors. Wash the covering
carefully and allow it to dry naturally. Avoid getting
water under the mat.
9
OPERATION
19 Electronic Instrument Cluster

1 Liquid crystal displays (LCD) (3) 5 Touch sensitive programming switches (11)
2 Indicator lamps (18) 6 Indicator lamps (3)
3 Bargraphs (2) 7 Touch sensitive light control switches (5)
4 Tractor performance monitor (TPM) 8 Bargraphs (2)
INTRODUCTION 1. The central LCD has transmission gear informa-

tion at the top. Engine speed appears in the centre
The electronic instrument cluster (EIC) is shown in
display and the lower display shows operating hours,
Figure 19, with a typical operating display.
ground speed or PTO speed, as selected.
2. The upper section consists of coloured indicator

When the key-start switch is turned on, a self-test of or warning lamps, which provide operating informa-
all the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) segments is tion or give warning of system malfunction.
activated, the audible alarm will sound for approxi-
mately one second and all lamps will be illuminated 3. Coolant temperature and exhaust temperature
briefly, to confirm that the bulbs are functioning. The are displayed in the right-hand bargraphs.
LCD background areas are illuminated when the
tractor key switch is turned on. A dimmer control is
4. The Tractor Performance Monitor (TPM) is dis-
installed.
played on the right-hand side of the cluster. The TPM
provides information on 3-point hitch and other
selected system information. Fault code information
The EIC is divided into the following areas: is also displayed.
10
SECTION 2
5. Eleven touch-sensitive switches select different AUTOMATIC ENGINE SHUTDOWN (where fitted)
EIC functions displayed in the central LCD and TPM. This feature will automatically shut down the engine
The switches are also used for calibration purposes. within 30 seconds if engine or transmission oil
pressure falls below predetermined levels or if engine
6. The lower indicator lamps provide operating coolant or transmission oil temperature rises above
information and give warning of system malfunction. predetermined levels. This feature protects the en-
gine and drivetrain of an unattended tractor perform-
ing stationary P.T.O. work.
7. Five touch-sensitive switches are used to control
the work lights and instrument cluster back-lighting
brightness.
WARNING: The engine shutdown feature is
fully automatic. It can be overridden by the
8. Fuel level and engine oil pressure are displayed operator to drive the tractor to a safe location. The
in the left-hand bargraphs. override switch is to the right of the steering column
and should only be used to move the tractor far
enough to avoid a dangerous situation, such as on a
The following information details the operation and
railway crossing or in traffic, etc.
programming of the electronic instrument cluster
(EIC).
A lamp is illuminated in the switch when override is

enabled. See ‘Shutdown Override Switch Operation’
in the ‘Engine Operation’ section.
AUDIBLE ALARM - Figure 20
An audible alarm will sound when a warning light
illuminates or a bar graph indicates a malfunction.
The alarm will alert the operator that a malfunction
has occurred.
Depending on the severity of the malfunction, the

alarm will sound as follows:
Non-Critical Alarm - An audible alarm sounds for one

second only. The tractor will continue to operate, but
the cause of the alarm should be investigated and
corrected.
Critical Alarm - A continuous pulsating tone will

sound until the malfunction is corrected or the engine
is switched off. The alarm will sound and the engine
‘STOP’ message (1) will flash in the centre display for
30 seconds before automatic engine shutdown oc-
curs. The cause of the malfunction should be located
and corrected immediately to prevent damage to the
tractor.
The audible alarm has a rotary volume control located

on the left-hand side of the steering column, below the
front controls. Rotate the alarm cover to adjust the
volume. 20
11
OPERATION
21 Indicator and Warning Lamps

1 Left turn signal 11 Transmission, rear axle/hydraulic oil temperature
2 Trailer 2 turn signal 12 Hydraulic/transmission filters
3 Trailer 1 turn signal 13 PTO engaged
4 Not used 14 Programmable up-shift
5 Air cleaner 15 Programmable down-shift
6 Thermostart 16 Differential lock Auto
7 Coolant level low 17 FWD Auto
8 Alternator charge indicator 18 Right turn signal
9 Intercooler overheated 19 Parking brake
10 Transmission lubrication 20 System status
21 Headlight high beam
INDICATOR, WARNING LAMPS, AND AUDIBLE Each indicator or warning lamp is discussed under
ALARM - Figure 21 the corresponding heading found on the following
The twenty-one colored status lamps, shown above, pages.
provide operating information or give warning of
system malfunction. The malfunction warning lamps The indicator and warning lamps/audible alarm
are accompanied by an audible alarm. function as follows:
12
SECTION 2
Figure 22
1. Left Turn Signal

The lamp will flash in unison with the tractor left-hand
turn signal. An audible alarm will sound if the turn
signals are left on for more than two minutes.
2. Trailer 2 Turn Signal

The lamp will flash in unison with the tractor turn
signals if a second trailer is connected to the tractor
electrical system. 22
3. Trailer 1 Turn Signal

The lamp will flash in unison with the tractor turn
signals if a trailer is connected to the tractor electrical
system.
Figure 23
4. Not used for this application
5. Air Cleaner Restriction

The lamp will illuminate, accompanied by the non-
critical alarm if the air cleaner becomes blocked or
partially blocked. Stop the tractor and service the air
cleaner to prevent engine damage.
6. Thermostart
The lamp will illuminate when the Thermostart func-
tion is activated by the push switch to the left of the
steering column.
7. Coolant Level Low

The lamp will illuminate when coolant drops below the
sender level. A non-critical alarm will sound. Check
for leaks and refill the cooling system. 23
13
OPERATION
Figure 24
8. Alternator Charge Indicator

The lamp will illuminate if the alternator is not charging
the battery. The lamp will flash and the non-critical
alarm will sound if an overcharge condition occurs.
9. Intercooler Overheated
The lamp will illuminate and the non-critical alarm will
sound when an overheat condition occurs. The cause
of the alarm should be determined and corrected
before further operation or engine damage may
occur. 24
10. Transmission Oil Pressure

The lamp will illuminate, accompanied by the critical
alarm, to indicate that the transmission lubrication
circuit oil pressure is low. The engine ‘STOP’ mes-
sage will flash for 30 seconds before automatic
shutdown occurs. Stop the engine immediately and
investigate the cause.
11. Transmission, Rear Axle/Hydraulic Oil Tem-

perature
Lamp illuminated accompanied by the critical alarm,
to indicate high oil temperature. The engine ‘STOP’
message will flash for 30 seconds before automatic
engine shutdown occurs. Stop the engine immediate-
ly and investigate the cause.
25
Figure 25
12. Hydraulic/Transmission Filters

The lamp will illuminate continuously if the hydraulic
filter becomes blocked or partially blocked.
A flashing lamp indicates that the transmission filter

is blocked or partially blocked. Both are accom-
panied by a non-critical alarm. The filter(s) should be
serviced as soon as practical and certainly within 1
hour of operation. 14. Programmable Up-Shift
The lamp will illuminate when programmable up-shift
is selected.
13. PTO Engaged
The lamp will illuminate whenever the engine is
running and PTO is engaged. The lamp will flash and 15. Programmable Down-Shift
a five second alarm will sound if the operator leaves The lamp will illuminate when programmable down-
the seat while the PTO is engaged. shift is selected.
14
SECTION 2
Figure 26
16. Differential Lock Auto

The lamp will illuminate when the differential lock is
switched to the automatic mode.
Auto differential lock will disengage and the lamp will

go out when one brake is applied. When the brake is
released, the differential lock will re-engage and the
light will illuminate again. Similarly, when the fast
raise/work switch is activated then de-activated, the
differential lock will disengage then re-engage.
NOTE: The auto differential lock will disengage 26

automatically when tractor speed exceeds 16 km/hr
(10 MPH).
17. Four Wheel Drive (FWD) Auto

The lamp will illuminate when FWD is switched to the
automatic mode.
NOTE: FWD will disengage and the lamp will go out

when one brake is applied. When the brake is
released, the light will illuminate again to signify that
Auto FWD has re-engaged.
SYSTEM STATUS P
18. Right Turn Signal

The lamp will flash in unison with the tractor right- 21 20 19
hand turn signal. An audible alarm will sound if the
turn signals are left on for more than two minutes.
27
Figure 27
19. Parking Brake

If the operator leaves the seat with the engine running
With the key-start switch on, a continually illuminated
and gear shift in neutral, a pulsating alarm will sound,
lamp indicates that the parking brake is applied. If the
in unison with the flashing parking brake lamp for 2
gearshift lever is moved from neutral, with the parking
minutes or until the brake is applied.
brake applied, the alarm will sound, the transmission
will be disabled and a ‘P’ will flash in the gear display.
To drive the tractor, move the shift lever to neutral, 20. System Status
apply the foot brake, release the parking brake and The lamp is illuminated when all systems are normal.
select a transmission gear. It flashes when a malfunction is detected in a system
monitored by the warning lamps or bargraphs.
If the key-start switch is turned off, and the parking
brake is not applied, a pulsating alarm will sound
continuously in unison with the flashing parking brake 21. Headlight Main Beam
lamp for approximately two minutes or until the The lamp will illuminate when the tractor headlights
parking brake is applied, whichever occurs first. are switched to main beam.
15
OPERATION
28
BARGRAPH DISPLAYS (LCD) Stop the engine immediately and investigate the
The four bargraphs each consist of twenty LCD cause.
segments.
All bargraph sensors are continuously tested for NOTE: The bargraph indicates engine oil pressure
faults. If a fault occurs, the bargraph will flash and a only. It is not an indication of oil level. The engine oil
fault code will be stored in the computer memory. level must be checked daily by means of the dipstick.
Figure 28
Fuel Level (1) Engine Coolant Temperature (3)

The outer left-hand bargraph shows fuel level. Each The right-hand inner bargraph registers coolant
segment of the bargraph display represents approxi- temperature. One segment of the bargraph will be
mately one-twentieth (5%) of the total fuel content of displayed if the engine is cold. The number of
the tank. segments displayed will increase as the engine
warms up. With the engine at normal operating
When the fuel level falls so that only two segments of temperature, up to fifteen segments will be displayed.
the bargraph are displayed, the bargraph will flash The normal working range is indicated by the green
continually and the non-critical alarm will sound for area of the adjacent range display.
one second.
Should the coolant temperature exceed a predeter-

Engine Oil Pressure (2) mined level, the coolant temperature bargraph will
The inner left-hand bargraph indicates engine oil flash, the critical alarm will sound, the word ‘STOP’ will
pressure. With normal engine oil pressure, up to flash in the central display for 30 seconds, then the
sixteen segments of the bargraph will be displayed. engine will automatically shut down.
This is represented by the green area of the adjacent
range display. Stop the engine immediately and investigate the
Should engine oil pressure fall below a predeter- cause.
mined level, the bargraph will flash, the critical alarm
will sound, the word ‘STOP’ will flash in the central NOTE: The bargraph indicates engine coolant tem-
display for 30 seconds, then the engine will automati- perature only. It is not an indication of coolant level.
cally shut down. The engine coolant must be checked daily.
16
SECTION 2
Exhaust Temperature (4)

The right-hand outer bargraph relates to engine
exhaust temperature. The number of segments
displayed will increase as the engine warms up. With
the engine at normal operating temperature, up to
fifteen segments will be displayed which is repre-
sented by the green area of the adjacent range
display. With an exhaust temperature overheat condi-
tion, a non-critical alarm will sound and the bargraph
will flash.
Reduce the engine load until the temperature returns

to the normal operating range.
CENTRAL DISPLAY (LCD) - Figure 29

Three liquid crystal displays (LCD) are located in the
centre of the instrument cluster.
At the top of the display is the digital transmission gear

shift position display (1).
In the centre is the digital engine speed display (2).
The lower LCD (3) will display:
• Engine hours accumulated (actual time)
• Tractor ground speed (MPH or km/h)
29
• PTO speed (rev/min)
• Service Reminder
TRANSMISSION GEARSHIFT DISPLAY (LCD) -

Figure 30
The upper LCD (1) displays transmission information.
The left-hand display (2) shows a letter as follows:
F = Forward gear selected *
N = Neutral selected
R = Reverse gear selected *
C = Creeper gear speeds selected (where fitted) 30
17
OPERATION
Figure 31
A = Automatic shift selected
P = Parking brake applied *
U = Up- shift selected *
d = Down- shift selected *
* If the letter is flashing, the display is indicating an

‘Operator Prompt’. To return to normal operation, the
shift control lever must be returned to neutral.
The right-hand display (3) represents the gear ratio

selected (1 - 18). 31
ENGINE SPEED DIGITAL DISPLAY - Figure 32

With the engine running, the digital value (1) of engine
speed will be displayed, together with the RPM
legend (2) in the central LCD.
The engine LCD will register in increments of 10 RPM.
If a critical engine or driveline fault should occur, the

word ‘STOP’ will flash for 30 seconds in the display
area and the engine will shut down automatically.
SELECTABLE DISPLAYS - Figures 33 to 35

Using the key pad, the lower display will allow the
operator to select one of three displays as follows:
32
Engine Hour Meter

When the key-start switch is turned on, the LCD will
display the hours the engine has operated (1) Figure
33 and the hour meter symbol (2).
The operator may manually select another function

such as ground speed or PTO speed. Driving the
tractor will cause the display to change automatically
to ground speed. The hour meter display may be
recalled at any time by touching switch (3) Figure 35.
With the engine running, the hour meter will accumu-

late hours in increments of 0.1 hours until 1999.9
hours are reached. After that time, the hour meter will
accumulate complete hours only, e.g. 2000, 2001
hours, etc. 33
18
SECTION 2
NOTE: Accumulated hours are stored in the comput-

er permanent memory which is not affected by
disconnecting the tractor batteries.
The hour meter may be programmed to remind the

operator when the next scheduled service is due.
When a Service is due, the word ‘SERVICE’ (3)
Figure 34, will flash along with the selected display.
See ‘Programming the Service Reminder Indicators’.
Ground Speed Display (Speedometer)

NOTE: The electronic instrument panel is set at the
factory to display either English (Imperial - MPH & 34
FT) or Metric (km/h & METERS). If required, the
display may be reprogrammed to show the desired
values by holding in the E/M switch (4) Figure 35, for
three seconds. The display will change and convert
the digits to the new values.
Touch the switch (1) Figure 35, to show the ground

speed in the main display. The MPH or km/h legend
(5) Figure 34, as appropriate, will also be displayed.
NOTE: The speedometer senses rotation of the rear

axle and may be subject to errors caused by the
effects of wheel slip, tyre pressures/condition, etc. If
the optional radar sensor is installed, the tractor
senses true ground speed for greater accuracy.
NOTE: The lower central display will automatically

show ground speed if the tractor is travelling at more
35
than 12.4 MPH (20 km/h). If required to display any
other function, while travelling above this speed, the
appropriate selector switch must be held depressed.
Power Take-Off Display - 540/1000 RPMP.T.O.-

equipped Units (170 h.p. model only)
Touch switch (2) Figure 35 and the PTO 540 legend (4)
Figure 34, will display, together with a digital display of
PTO speed. If the 1000 rev/min PTO shaft is in use,
touch the selector switch again and the PTO 1000
legend will display together with the PTO speed.
The PTO has a non-critical overspeed alert. If the 540

PTO speed exceeds 630 RPM or the 1000 PTO
speed is greater than 1152 RPM, the ‘PTO ON’ status 1000 RPM P.T.O.-equipped Units (190, 210 and
lamp will flash and a one second audible alarm will 240 h.p. models)
sound. The green system status lamp will also flash Touch the switch (2) Figure 35 and the ‘PTO 1000’
when the PTO status ‘overspeed’ alert occurs. legend will display, together with the PTO speed.
19
OPERATION
TRACTOR PERFORMANCE MON-

ITOR (TPM)
INTRODUCTION - Figure 36
The Tractor Performance Monitor (TPM) (1) is located
in the lower, right-hand panel and includes:
AUTOMATIC DISPLAY INFORMATION

• Hitch enabled
• Hitch position digital value
• Hitch disabled
36
• Fault code indicator
SELECTABLE DISPLAY INFORMATION

• Area per hour forecaster (acres or hectares)
• Area accumulated (acres or hectares)
• Wheel slip percentage with adjustable alarm

point (optional feature)
• Battery voltage
• 540 PTO speed in RPM (where applicable)
• 1000 PTO speed in RPM scale
• Distance measurement in feet or metres.
AUTOMATIC DISPLAY INFORMATION

The following information is automatically displayed:
Hitch Disabled Symbol - Figure 37

The hitch disabled symbol (1) is displayed when the
3-point linkage is out of phase with the 3-point hitch
control lever. See ‘3-Point Hitch Control’.
NOTE: If the Hitch Disabled symbol is flashing, a fault

has occurred. The 3-point hitch warning light will also
be flashing on the right-hand console which requires
attention before proper operation of the tractor hitch
can occur. See ‘Fault Code Indicator’.
Hitch Position Display - Figure 37

This display (2) advises the operator of the relative
position of the lower links (and implement) by means
of numbers ranging from ‘0’ (fully lowered position) to
‘99’ (maximum height position.) See ‘3-point Hitch
Control’. 37
20
SECTION 2
Hitch Enabled Symbol - Figure 38

The hitch enabled symbol (3) is displayed to advise
the operator when the 3-point linkage is in phase with
the lift control lever. See ‘3-Point Hitch Control’.
Fault Code Indicator - Figure 38

In the event that a fault occurs within the tractor’s
electrical circuits, a malfunction warning symbol
‘Read your Manual’ (4) will be displayed. Fault codes
can be reviewed using the procedure detailed in the
‘EIC-Programming’ section.
38
If the fault code indicator or fault codes are displayed,

refer to the ‘EIC Programming’ section for information
on retrieving and clearing the display.
SELECTABLE DISPLAY INFORMATION

The following information may be selected for display:
Area Per Hour Forecaster - Figure 39

Touch the AREA/HR switch (4). The ‘AREA/HOUR’
legend (1) will display, together with a forecast of the
area (2) that will be worked in one hour if the current
rate of work is continued.
This forecast is based on the last 5 seconds running

average. The forecast may be in acres (denoted by
FT) (3) or hectares (denoted by METERS). The unit
of measure, FT or METER, may be changed by
pressing the E/M switch for 3 seconds.
‘0’ will be displayed whenever the tractor is stopped.
NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, area per

hour calculations are based on axle speed and are
subject to inaccuracies caused by any wheel slip that
may occur. 39
21
Area Accumulator - Figure 40
Accumulated area (total area worked) (1) can be
displayed by depressing the AREA switch (2). Area is
displayed in acres or hectares. ‘AREA ON’ (6) will be
displayed. Touch the START/STOP switch (3) and the
word ‘OFF’ (5) will display indicating the area counter
is shut off. If the 3-point hitch is raised, the word ‘OFF’
should appear to stop area accumulation. Lower the
3-point hitch to again display ‘AREA ON’ and continue
accumulating area.
Imperial display (acres), designated by the ‘FT’

legend (4) starts to accumulate in increments of 0.1
40
acres. When 1000 acres are reached, area accu-
mulation continues in whole acres. When 9999 acres
are reached, the display will reset to zero.
Metric display (hectares), designated by the legend

METERS starts to accumulate in increments of .01
hectares. When 100.0 hectares are reached, area
accumulation continues in increments of 0.1 hectares
until 1000 is reached. The display will then accumu-
late whole hectares. When 9999 hectares are
reached, the display will reset to zero.
With AREA selected, area accumulation can be reset

to zero by holding down the START/STOP switch (3)
for three seconds until a ‘beep’ is heard from the
audible alarm.
NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, area

calculations are based on axle speed and are subject
to inaccuracies caused by anywheel slip that may
occur.
Wheel Slip (with radar option) - Figure 41

Touch the % SLIP selector switch (4). The ‘% SLIP’
legend (1) will display together with a two-digit slip
value (2) in the main TPM display. The slip value is
detected by the comparison of theoretical ground
speed (axle rotation sensor) with true ground speed
(radar sensor).
Slip zero calibration occurs automatically. However,

when widely differing soil conditions are encoun-
tered, it may be necessary to manually zero the wheel
slip ratio, as follows: 41
22
SECTION 2
Drive the tractor in the soil conditions to be worked,

with implement raised, at a constant speed of less
than 10 MPH (16 km/h). This will determine the
minimum wheel slip under light operating conditions
to be used as a 0% reference point. With % SLIP
function selected, hold down the START/STOP
switch (5) for at least three seconds.
A ‘beep’ from the alarm and ‘0’ in the display indicates

that the module has been calibrated to a minimum slip
condition.
WARNING: The radar ground speed sensor

emits a low intensity microwave signal which
will not cause any ill effects in normal use. Although
the signal intensity is low, do not look directly into the
face of the sensor while in operation so as to avoid
eye damage.
IMPORTANT: Before carrying out arc welding on the

tractor or on any equipment attached to the tractor,
disconnect all power and earth leads from the
batteries in order to avoid possible damage to
electronic components.
Slip Alarm (with radar option) - Figure 41

A slip alarm point may be entered - see ‘EIC
Programming’. When wheel slip exceeds the value
entered, the alarm will sound for 1 second. If wheel
slip is selected, the ‘% SLIP’ (1) legend will be
42
displayed. In addition, the ‘ALARM’ (3) legend will
flash and continue to flash until wheel slip is reduced
below the preset level.
Battery Voltage - Figure 42

Touch the SET UP/SELECT switch (3). The VOLTS
legend (1) will display, together with a digital display
of battery voltage (2) to the nearest 0.1 volt.
PTO Speed 540 RPM Scale (where applicable)

- Figure 43
Touch the SET UP/SELECT switch (4) again and the
‘540 PTO’ legend (1) will be displayed, together with
a digital display of PTO speed (2). This feature allows
the operator to view both PTO speed and ground
speed while operating. 43
23
OPERATION
PTO Speed 1000 RPM Scale - Figure 44

‘1000 PTO’ legend (3) will be displayed, together with
a digital display of PTO speed (2). This feature allows
the operator to view both PTO speed and ground
speed while operating.
Distance Measurement - Figure 45

‘DIST FT’ (1) or ‘DIST METERS’ legend will be
displayed. The tractor will now measure distance in 44
feet or metres. Operate the tractor normally and press
the START/STOP switch (5) at the point where
distance measuring is to begin. The ‘ON’ legend (2)
will be displayed along with a digital display of
distance travelled (3). At the end of the distance,
again press the START/STOP switch (5). The dis-
tance travelled in feet or metres will remain in the
display together with the ‘OFF’ legend (4). If the
START/STOP switch is again pressed, additional feet
or metres will be added to the existing measurement.
Pressing the START/STOP switch (5) for more than

three seconds will zero the display.
45
PROGRAMMING THE TPM
OPERATOR CALIBRATION
Figure 46
In order that the modules may correctly calculate and
display work done (area per hour, area accumulated,
etc.) various factors must be entered into the mod-
ules.
To enter the set up mode, turn the key-start switch on

and hold down the SET UP/SELECT switch (2) for
three seconds until a ‘beep’ is heard. 46
24
SECTION 2
Figure 47
The TPM display will indicate - - - 1, which means the
EIC is in the first of 12 programming and diagnostic
modes. Touching the DIGIT SET switch (4) Figure 46,
will cycle through modes 1 - 12. Mode 1 is for
operator calibrations. Modes 2 - 12 are not operator
functions, but are described in the Repair Manual.
To enter Mode 1, hold the SET UP/SELECT switch (1)

for three seconds. The TPM display will show IMP.
WIDTH CAL and a flashing left-hand digit.
When in the set up mode, repeatedly touching the 47

SET UP/SELECT switch (1) will cause the modules to
run through the various set up functions in the
following order:
1. Implement width
2. Slip alarm point (option)
3. Service Reminder I
4. Service Reminder II
5. Ground speed calibration
6. Area Preset
48
7. Fault code display - ON/OFF
SETTING IMPLEMENT WIDTH - Figure 48

In order that the modules may calculate the work
done, the working width of the implement in use must
be entered into the memory.
Implement width is a four-digit display and will appear

as ‘000.0’ feet (2) or ‘00.00’ metres with the left-hand
digit (1) flashing. ‘IMP WIDTH CAL’ (7) and either ‘FT’
(6) or ‘METERS’ will also be displayed.
Touch the digit select switch (4) to move the flashing

digit to the right. Touch the digit set switch (5) to
increase the numerical value of the flashing digit.
25
OPERATION
Figure 49
For example: To set an implement working width of
12.5 feet, a display of ‘012.5’ is required. Touch the
DIGIT SELECT switch (4) to cause the second digit
from the left to flash. Touch the DIGIT SET switch (5)
to change the flashing digit from ‘0’ to ‘1’.
Use the DIGIT SELECT (4) and DIGIT SET (5)

switches to change the remaining digits until ‘012.5’
is displayed.
NOTE: The area measured will only be accurate if

there is no implement overlap when the tractor turns
around at the end of a run to make another pass.
49
Alternatively, the implement width entered into
memory may be reduced by the estimated amount of
overlap.
With the required implement width displayed, touch

the SET UP/SELECT switch (3) to enter the imple-
ment width into memory and change the display to the
% SLIP alarm point.
Setting the Slip Alarm Point (Option) - Figure 50

NOTE: If the optional radar unit is not installed, the slip
alarm function will be omitted from the sequence.
The slip alarm point will appear as a two-digit display

(1) with the left-hand digit flashing. ‘% SLIP’ (2) and
‘ALARM’ (3) will also be displayed with the word CAL
(4).
Use DIGIT SET (7) and DIGIT SELECT (6) switches 50

to change the value to the required setting. If the slip
alarm is not required, set the display (1) to ‘00’.
With the required slip alarm point displayed, touch the

SET UP/SELECT switch (5) to change the lower
display to show the first Service Reminder (see
following text).
PROGRAMMING THE SERVICE REMINDERS

- Figures 51 to 54
Figure 51
During normal tractor operation, the hour meter will
reach preprogrammed service intervals. This causes
the word ‘SERVICE’ (1) to flash whenever the key is
on if a service is due. The symbol will flash for the next
10 hours of operation or until the specific service is
completed and the display is reset. 51
26
SECTION 2
The operator can programme 1, 2 or no Service

Reminders into the lower selectable LCD.
Example: The operator wants the hour meter to signal

for minor service every 50 hours and a major service
every 300 hours:
Figure 52
The letter ‘I’ (1) and the 3-digit number (2) in the
display corresponds to the ‘next service due’ interval
previously entered into the memory. If ‘I 025’ is
displayed, the hour meter will signal the operator
every 25 hours that service is due. A ‘I 000 52
programmed into the display will disable the Service
Reminder.
The left-hand digit of the display will be flashing. If the

digit is already reading ‘0’, there is no need to change
it. Touch the DIGIT SELECT switch (3) to select the
next digit to the right, which will flash.
Figure 53
Each touch of the DIGIT SET switch (6) will increase
the value of the flashing digit (1) by one. When the
digit value reaches ‘5’, touch the DIGIT SELECT
switch (5) which will cause the next digit (2) in the
display to flash. Change the value of this digit, if
necessary, using the DIGIT SET switch (6) as
previously described until it reaches ‘0’.
53
With ‘I 050’ displayed, touch the SET UP/SELECT
switch (4). The Service Reminder II can now be
programmed for the 300- hour service interval.
Every 50 hours of tractor operation the word ‘SER-

VICE’ will flash when the key is on. The display will
continue to flash until the START/STOP, RESET
switch (3) is used to cancel the flashing display after
re-entering the Service Reminder programming
mode.
Figure 54
To programme the Service Reminder II, the process
is the same as for Service Reminder I, but when the
SET UP/SELECT switch (3) is touched, the legend ‘I’
(1) will change to ‘II’. The next digit (2) will be flashing,
indicating that the operator can now programme the
300-hour Service Reminder Interval II. 54
27
OPERATION
CANCELLING THE SERVICE REMINDERS

- Figure 55
To identify which service is due and to cancel the
reminder after the service has been completed,
re-enter the service reminder programming menu. If
the word ‘SERVICE’ (1) is flashing and a single ‘I’ is
displayed, complete the 50-hour service as de-
scribed in the Lubrication and Maintenance section
and cancel the reminder by holding the START/STOP,
RESET switch (3) for three seconds.
The left digit will begin flashing, indicating that the

service hour interval can now be changed. If no
change is desired, touch the SET UP/SELECT switch
55
(4) to select the service reminder ‘II’. If the word
‘SERVICE’ (1) is flashing and ‘II’ (5) is displayed, the
300-hour service (2) is required.
To cancel the reminder after the service has been

completed, hold the START/STOP, RESET switch (3)
for three seconds.
NOTE: If the START/STOP, RESET switch (3) is held

for an additional three seconds, the previously stored
service reminder interval will be reset to 0. To
reprogramme a new interval, review the previous
programming steps.
After the service intervals have been entered, touch

the SET UP/SELECT switch (4) to view and change
the Ground Speed Calibration constant, as follows:
GROUND SPEED CALIBRATION (tractors with- 56

out radar sensor)
The ground speed in the display is calibrated in the
factory to suit the static radius of the rear tyres.
However, should tyres of a different size be installed,
weights or equipment permanently installed on the
tractor that would alter the static radius of the tyres by
more than 0.25 in. (6 mm), the EIC should be
recalibrated to display a more accurate ground speed
using the following method:
Ensure that the tyre pressures are correct for the load
being carried. See ‘Tyre Load/Inflation Tables’.
Figure 56
Park the tractor on a firm, level surface and carefully
measure the distance from the centre of the rear hub
to the ground (1). This is the actual static loaded
radius.
28
SECTION 2
Figure 57
While in the programming mode, ensure that the word
‘CAL’ (4) the ‘FT’ (3) or ‘METERS’ legend and the
previously entered calibration number (2) is dis-
played with the left-hand digit (1) flashing.
If required, change the value of the flashing digit using

the DIGIT SET switch (7) as described previously in
‘Programming the Service Reminders’.
Enter the actual static loaded radius of the tyre in

inches to the closest 0.1 in. (or to the closest mm if
using metric units). 57
NOTE: The lowest allowable number is 26 inches

(641 mm).
To select the next digit to the right, use the DIGIT

SELECT switch (6) and when that digit is flashing use
the DIGIT SET switch (7) to change the value. Repeat
for the remaining digits.
When the required calibration number is displayed,

enter it into the memory by holding the SET UP/SE-
LECT switch (5) for three seconds. Touch the switch
again to cycle to the next calibration step which is
Area Preset’.
GROUND SPEED CALIBRATION (tractors with 58

radar sensor)
The ground speed on tractors equipped with the
optional radar sensor is automatically recalibrated.
This automatic recalibration takes place over a 15
minute time span whenever the tractor is driven at
speeds exceeding 16 km/hr (10 MPH).The steps
described in the previous paragraphs are not neces-
sary.
The area preset will appear as a four-digit display (1)

AREA PRESET - Figure 58 with the left-hand digit flashing. ‘AREA’ (8) will also be
Normally, area would be reset to zero by holding the displayed in the LCD along with ‘CAL’ (2) and FT (7)
START/STOP switch (3) down, when in the AREA or METERS. Use the DIGIT SET (6) and DIGIT
PRESET calibration mode, until a ‘beep’ is heard from SELECT (5) switches, as previously described, to
the alarm (approximately three seconds). However, it is change the value to the desired setting or to zero.
possible to enter a value other than zero and measure
additional area worked. Area measured during a Touch the SET UP/SELECT switch (4) and the display
previous operation can be entered. will cycle to fault codes ON/OFF.
29
OPERATION
FAULT CODES ON/OFF - Figure 59

Fault codes can be viewed during tractor operation or
stored to allow full operation of the TPM.
In the event that a fault occurs within the tractor

electrical circuits, a malfunction warning symbol
‘Read Your Manual’ (1) will be displayed.
The tractor is factory set to display normal TPM

functions and to store fault codes. The ‘OFF’ legend
(3) will be displayed.
To view fault codes as they occur, press the START/

STOP switch (4) The display will show the ‘Read Your
Manual’ symbol (1) and the ‘ON’ legend (2) Press the
59
START/STOP switch again and the ‘Read Your
Manual’ symbol (1) and the ‘OFF’ legend (3) will be
displayed.
When ‘ON’ is displayed, fault codes will appear as

they occur and also become stored in the memory.
When ‘OFF’ is displayed, the fault code will be stored
in the memory and the ‘Read Your Manual’ symbol (1)
will be displayed.
Fault Codes Display - Figure 60

Fault codes (1) will be flashing three-digit numbers
preceded by the letter ‘F’.
The fault code indicates the tractor circuit or sensor in

which the fault lies and the type of fault, e.g., short
circuit, open circuit, sensor failure, etc. If these codes
should occur, contact your authorised dealer and
quote the fault code number displayed. 60
The modules and fault code ranges are as follows:
Fault
Code No. System Module
F000 - F099 Electronic Draft Control
F100 - F199 Right-hand Controls
F200 - F299 Electronic Instrument Cluster
F300 - F399 Electronic Transmission Control
F400 - F499 Engine
30
SECTION 2
Clearing Fault Codes - Figure 61

During normal operation, when fault code ‘ON’ is
selected, all fault codes will be displayed as they
occur and continue flashing until the fault is corrected.
The code(s) can be temporarily cleared to return to

normal operation by holding the START/STOP switch
(2) for three seconds. When the key switch is turned
to off and the tractor is restarted, the fault code(s) will
be redisplayed. Use the START/STOP switch to again
cancel the display of the fault codes.
61
Touch the SET UP/SELECT switch (3) and the display

will cycle back to the first programming step for review
or further programming.
Exiting the Set Up Mode - Figure 62

To exit the operator calibration mode, touch the E/M
switch (2) The display (1) will show ‘- - - 1’. Touching
the switch again will return the display to normal
operation. Alternatively, to exit the set up mode, turn
the key-start switch off.
The EIC and Tractor Performance Monitor are now

programmed for use. 62
E.I.C. LIGHTING DISPLAY
LIGHTING DISPLAY - Figure 63

The lighting display is used to activate and monitor the
dash and work light circuits.
The operation of the lighting display (1) is covered

under the ‘Lighting and Accessory Power’ heading,
as follows: 63
31
OPERATION
LIGHTS AND ACCESSORY POWER

POINTS
F
H
MASTER LIGHTS SWITCH - (E) Figure 64
The lights are controlled by the four position master
lights switch, as follows:
A Fully anti-clockwise is off G
B Parking lights on
C Headlights and parking lights on E
D Work lights, headlights and parking lights on. The 64

work lights are selected by using the touch-sensitive
switches (H).
If the master lights switch is turned anti-clockwise

from position D, all work lights will turn off. When the
master switch is again turned to the work lights
position, the same work lights will be illuminated.
WORK LIGHTS - (H) and (F) Figure 64

The work light selector switches (H) are numbered
from 1 to 4. These numbers correspond to the lighting
positions in the monitor (F). PANEL DIM CONTROL - (G) Figure 64
The dimmer control can be activated with the master
To operate the lower front and side work lights, touch lights on or off. Touch the dimmer switch and the
selector switch 1. The indicator lights will illuminate at instrument console back lights will go from bright to
position 1 on the monitor to indicate the lights are dim. Hold the switch and the lights will dim to whatever
activated. level the operator requires.
To operate the lower rear work lights, touch selector Touch the switch again to select full brightness.
switch 2. The indicator light will illuminate at position
2 on the monitor to indicate the lights are activated.
ROOF BEACON SWITCH (dealer-installed ac-
To operate the upper rear work lights, touch selector cessory) - (5) Figure 64
switch 3. The indicator light will illuminate at position Push the top of the switch to actuate the roof-mounted
3 on the monitor to indicate the lights are activated. rotary beacon. The top of the switch is illuminated when
on. Push the bottom of the switch to turn the beacon off.
NOTE: If the hazard lights are on, the rear work lights
will automatically be turned off.
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS - (6) Figure 64
To operate the optional upper front work lights 4, The switch is internally illuminated and, when actu-
touch selector switch 4. The indicator light will ated by pushing the top of the switch, will flash in
illuminate at position 4 on the monitor to indicate the unison with all the tractor and trailer turn signals and
lights are activated. the green indicator lamps in the EIC.
Touch any switch a second time to turn the respective Push the bottom of the switch to turn off the hazard
lights off. lights.
32
SECTION 2
INTERIOR LIGHTS - Figure 65

Two lights are provided to illuminate the cab interior.
Each light switch may be independently set to one of
three positions:
A = On.
B = Off.
C = On when a door is opened.
65
MULTI- FUNCTION SWITCH - Figure 66
The stalk-type multi-function switch operates the
horn, turn signals, headlight flash and is used to
select main or dipped beam. The stalk has four
operating positions:
Turn Signals
Move the stalk to position (1) to indicate a right-hand
turn. Move the stalk to position (4) to indicate a
left-hand turn.
The turn signal warning light (and trailer lights, if

connected) will also flash when the signals are
operated.
Headlight Flash
With the headlights off or with dipped beam head-
lights on, move the stalk, against spring pressure, to
position (2) to flash the main beams. When released,
the stalk will return to the original position.
Headlights Main/Dipped Beam

With the headlights switched on, move the stalk,
against spring pressure, to position (3) to change
from main beam to dipped beam or vice-versa.
Horn
Press in the end of the stalk (5) to operate the horn. 66
33
OPERATION
FRONT LIGHTS - Figure 67

The optional upper front work lights (1) are illuminated
by touching the work light selector switch 4 with the
master switch in the work light position.
The turn signal/hazard lights (2) are selected with the

hazard warning light switch or the multi-function
switch.
All eight lower work lights (3) are illuminated by

touching the work light selector switch 1 with the
master switch in the work light position. 67
The headlights (4) are illuminated when the master

lights switch is in the headlight or work light position.
Main or dipped beam is selected by means of the
multi-function switch.
REAR LIGHTS - Figure 68

The upper rear work lights (1) are illuminated when
the master switch is in the work light position and
selector switch 3 is touched.
The rear turn signal/hazard lights (2) flash in unison

with the front turn signal/hazard lights. 68
The reversing lights (3) illuminate when a reverse

gear ratio is selected.
The lower rear work lights (4) are illuminated when

the master switch is in the work light position and work
light selector switch 2 is touched. The centre work
light may be turned off while leaving the outer lamps
illuminated. Use the toggle switch located on the rear
of the centre lamp’s housing to turn off the light.
The rear lights (5) are illuminated with the light switch
in the park, headlight or work light position. The brake
lights are combined with the rear lights and illuminate
when both brake pedals are depressed.
34
SECTION 2
IN CAB AUXILIARY SOCKETS - Figure 69
Single Pin Auxiliary Socket

A 12-volt single pin power socket (1) is located in the
rear, right-hand of the cab. The socket has an 8-amp
rating to power electrical monitoring equipment and is
activated by the key-start switch.
Three Pin Auxiliary Socket - Figure 69

A 12-volt, three pin socket (2) is installed to allow the
attachment and operation of electronic control boxes.
Terminal (3) is controlled by the key switch. The

terminal has a 30-amp rating. 69
Terminal (4) is powered continually. The terminal has

an 8-amp rating.
Terminal (5) is earth.
EXTERNAL AUXILIARY SOCKETS - Figure 70
Seven Pin Auxiliary Socket

A standard seven pin socket (1) is provided to operate
the electrical system on implements and trailers. Pin
information is as follows:
Pin No. Circuit
1 L.H. Turn Signal

2 Work Light
3 Earth
4 R.H. Turn Signal 70
5 R.H. Parking Light
6 Stop Lights
7 L.H. Parking Light
NOTE: Mating connectors for the single, three and

seven pin sockets are available through your autho-
rised dealer.
AUXILIARY CONTROL MOUNTING LOCATIONS

- Figure 71
Two 10 mm cap screws (2) are located in the
right-hand, rear panel for attaching an equipment
monitor or control box.
An alternate mounting position is provided on the

inner face of the right-hand, front A-post. Remove
the plastic plugs (1) from the captive nuts and install
10 mm bolts to attach the control or monitor. 71
35
OPERATION
AUXILIARY CONTROL CABLE ROUTING

Two locations are provided for routing the operating
cables from the control box to the attachment.
Rear Window Grommet - Figure 72

A rubber grommet (1) is provided to allow equipment
control cables (2) to pass through the rear window
frame (3).
Pull the grommet (1) up to remove. Slit the grommet

72
from the bottom into the hollow centre (4). Route
implement controls through the grommet, then re-
install.
Removable Panel - Figure 73

A removable panel (1) is located below the rear
window. Remove the panel to access the opening in
the rear cab wall. Route the controls through the
opening. Store the panel and attaching screws for
future use.
BRAKES
73
FOOT BRAKES - Figure 74

All tractors are equipped with hydraulically assisted,
self-adjusting, power brakes. The hydraulic assist
only functions with the engine running.
With the engine off, the brakes will still function but a
higher pedal effort is required. Use both parking brake
and foot brakes to stop with the engine not running.
CAUTION: Use caution when towing loads at

transport speeds. Reduce speed if the towed
load weighs more than the tractor and is not equipped
with brakes. Avoid hard braking applications. (Con-
sult the implement operator’s manual for recom-
mended transport speeds.) 74
36
SECTION 2
Figure 74 (continued)
The foot brakes may be operated independently to
aid turning or together for normal stopping. When
operating in the field it is advised that the brake pedals
be unlocked.
WARNING: Always lock the brakes together

when travelling on the highway. Never use
the brakes to aid turning at high speed.
To lock the brake pedals together, swing the lock plate

(1) into the slot on the right foot brake pedal (2).
To unlock the brake, position the plate (1) into the slot
on the left pedal (3).
The rear brake lights will be illuminated when both

brakes are applied.
Periodically test the brake pedals with the engine

stopped to make sure manual brake system is
functioning.
Never ride the brakes by resting a foot on the pedals.

This causes unnecessary wear on the brakes.
NOTE: Four wheel drive will automatically engage for

improved braking when both pedals are depressed. 75
PARKING BRAKE - Figure 75

To apply the parking brake, pull the lever (1), up. To
release, raise the lever up slightly, then depress the
button (2) and lower the lever.
IMPORTANT: To prevent the tractor from being
driven with the parking brake applied or partially
CAUTION: The parking brake must be en- applied, the transmission gear shift lever can be
gaged before the operator leaves the seat. moved but the transmission will not engage if the
parking brake is applied. A flashing ‘P’ will be
displayed in the transmission LCD of the EIC and the
NOTE: A two-minute pulsating audible alarm will
parking brake warning lamp will flash together with a
sound with a flashing parking brake lamp to remind
one-second audible alarm.
the operator to apply the parking brake if the tractor
engine is stopped without the parking brake applied.
To operate the transmission, return the shift control
lever to neutral. Apply the foot brakes, then release
The parking brake indicator lamp will illuminate when the parking brake and reselect a forward or reverse
the parking brake is applied. gear.
37
OPERATION
TRANSMISSION
POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION - Figure 76

Thoroughly read the following information before
operating the transmission.
The Powershift transmission is operated by a single

control lever (1). Because the transmission has only
one control lever, it is extremely easy to use.
NOTE: The control lever is equipped with a neutral

lock button (2) The control lever may only be moved
to the forward or reverse positions if the neutral lock 76
button on the control lever knob is depressed. Neutral
may be selected without depressing the neutral lock
button.
In place of the usual clutch pedal is an inching pedal.
The powershift transmission control lever is used to

select forward or reverse travel and to change
transmission speeds. Move the lever forward for
forward travel and rearward for reverse travel.
NOTE: The transmission directional clutches require

calibration after the first 50 hours of use and thereafter
every 1200 hours (or every 300 hours if the tractor is
subjected to arduous use). If harsh changes are
noted, the transmission may require recalibration.
See your authorised dealer or refer to Operations 34
and 51 in Section 3.
The powershift transmission control lever is also used

IMPORTANT: The Powershift transmission should
to make instantaneous upward or downward gear
not be towed other than to remove it from the field or
ratio changes. Nudge the lever to the right for upward
onto a transporter. Do not attempt to tow-start the
changes and to the left for downward changes. In this
tractor. See ‘Starting The Tractor With Jump Leads’ in
context, ‘nudge’ means move the lever and then
this section of the manual.
release.
NOTE: Powershift transmission is capable of propel-

Consecutive gear ratio changes may be made, either
ling the tractor at 40 km/h. However, in countries
by nudging the lever several times or by holding the
where a 30 km/h speed limit applies, the computer
lever to the left or right and allowing the transmission
module controlling the transmission is programmed
to shift through the gear ratios automatically.
to prevent travel at illegal speeds. Should any attempt
be made to exceed 30 km/h in 17th. or 18th. gear, the
WARNING: Always engage the parking transmission will automatically down-shift one or two
brake before leaving the tractor. The trans- ratios. Should future legislation in your country permit
mission will not prevent the tractor from rolling wheth- an increase in speed, the computer module may be
er the engine is running or shut off. readily reprogrammed. See your authorised dealer.
38
SECTION 2
DIGITAL DISPLAY - Figure 77

The function of the LCD display (1) is to indicate which
gear is selected and whether the transmission is in
forward (F), neutral (N), or reverse (R).
INCHING PEDAL - Figures 78 and 79
Figure 78
The inching pedal (1) is installed in place of the clutch
pedal found on tractors with a conventional trans-
mission. The inching pedal operates like a clutch, for
safe, accurate positioning of the tractor when hitching 77
up implements or operating in confined spaces, etc.
The inching pedal is not required for normal gear
changes.
Figure 79
Optimum inching control, particularly with heavy
loads, is achieved in the lowest ratios (F1 and R2).
The degree of inching control gradually diminishes as
higher gear ratios are selected up to 10th. speed. At
gear ratios higher than 10th., the electronic manage-
ment system takes over to protect the system from
misuse.
IMPORTANT: To ensure maximum transmission life,

avoid using the inching pedal as a footrest (‘riding’ the
pedal). Use of the inching pedal is only necessary if 78
the low gears are not slow enough at moderate/low
engine speeds to give precise control for operations
such as implement attachment, etc.
When using the inching pedal, particularly at high

engine speeds, avoid stalling the engine. Lubrication
of the transmission ceases under stall conditions and
is detrimental to the transmission.
The inching pedal may also be used to automatically

select a gear ratio to match load, engine speed and
road conditions. See ‘Speed Matching’ later in this
section.
To stop the tractor in an emergency, depress the

inching pedal and apply both foot brakes together. 79
39
OPERATION
STARTING THE ENGINE AND MOVING FOR-

WARD
There are two methods:
Method 1. - Preselect a Forward Gear Ratio Be-

fore Moving - Figures 80 and 81
Start the engine with the speed control lever in neutral
(the digital display will show ‘N5’).
Nudge or hold the control lever to the right and allow

the transmission to select any speed ratio between
5th. and 10th. as shown in the display. (10th. speed
is the highest available speed for moving from a
standstill). 80
To start in a speed ratio below 5th., nudge or hold the

control lever to the left and allow the display to change
sequentially from 5th. down to 1st.
Figure 81
After the desired gear ratio is selected, increase
engine speed, as required, by means of the throttle.
Depress the neutral lock button (2) Figure 76 and
move the control lever (1) forward.
To increase tractor speed, open the throttle further

and/or continue to nudge or hold the control lever to
the right to select a higher speed ratio.
To decrease speed, close the throttle and/or move the

control lever to the left to select a lower gear ratio.
81
Method 2. - Powershift Forward Gear Ratios

While Moving - Figure 82
With the engine running, depress the neutral lock
button and move the control lever forward (the digital
display will show ‘F5’ and the tractor will start to move
forward).
Increase engine speed and/or move the control lever

to the right and allow the transmission to run through
the gear ratios until the desired operating speed is
achieved.
To further increase tractor speed, open the throttle

more and/or continue to hold the control lever to the
right to select a higher ratio.
To decrease speed, close the throttle and/or hold the

control lever to the left to select a lower ratio. 82
40
SECTION 2
WARNING: Never move the control lever to

neutral when travelling at high speeds. This
could allow the transmission to speed match and it
may not be possible to reselect the original gear ratio,
particularly if travelling down a steep gradient. In any
event, actions such as coasting should never be
practiced, for safety reasons.
STARTING THE ENGINE AND MOVING IN RE-

VERSE
As with forward travel, there are two methods:
Method 1. - Preselect a Reverse Gear Ratio Be-

fore Moving - Figure 83
Start the engine with the control lever in neutral (the
digital display will show N5’).
Nudge or hold the control lever to the right and allow the
transmission to select any gear ratio between 5th. and
10th. as shown in the display. Nudge the lever to the left
to sequentially select ratios down to 2nd.
NOTE: There are nine reverse gears, the lowest

shown as R2 in the digital display, the highest shown
as R10. They are numbered R2 to R10 since the
ground speeds correspond approximately to the
forward speeds F2 to F10.
After the desired gear ratio is selected, depress the

neutral lock button and move the control lever
rearward. To increase speed, open the throttle further
83
and/or hold the control lever to the right to select a
higher gear ratio.
To decrease speed, close the throttle and/or hold the

control lever to the left to select a lower gear ratio.
NOTE: If the transmission has been pre- pro-

grammed to select a different reverse from forward
gear, the neutral gear selected may change when
reverse gear is selected. See ‘Programming Reverse
Gear Ratios’ later in this section.
41
Method 2. - Powershift Reverse Gear Ratios
While Moving - Figure 84
With the engine running, depress the neutral lock
button and move the control lever rearward. The
digital display will show ‘R5’, provided the transmis-
sion has not been preprogrammed (see ‘Program-
ming Reverse Gear Ratios’ later in this section).
Nudge or hold the lever to the right and allow the
transmission to run through the gear ratios until the
desired operating speed is achieved.
To further increase tractor speed, open the throttle

more and/or hold the control lever to the right to select 84
a higher ratio.
To decrease speed, close the throttle and/or move the

control lever to the left to select a lower ratio.
Shuttle Operations
To change from forward to reverse travel, simply
depress the neutral lock button and move the control
lever fully rearward. This may be done at any engine
speed and with any gear ratio selected.
WARNING: Gear ratios 1 and 11 - 18 inclu-

sive are not available in reverse. If travelling
forward in, for example, 1st. gear, the lowest reverse
gear (2nd.) will be automatically selected when the
control lever is moved to the reverse position. The op-
erator should be aware of this feature as there will be
a corresponding increase in tractor speed.
Conversely, if travelling forward in, for example, 15th.

gear, the highest reverse gear (10th.) will be automat-
ically selected when the control lever is moved to the
reverse position with, a corresponding reduction in
tractor speed.
SPEED MATCHING
When travelling on the road in 10th. gear or higher, the
transmission will automatically select a ratio to match
the engine speed to the road speed if the following is
performed: 85
42
SECTION 2
Up- Shift - Figure 85

Momentarily depress the inching pedal, then de-
crease engine speed with the foot throttle. Release
the inching pedal, then increase engine speed. The
transmission will automatically select a higher ratio
(provided 18th. speed is not already selected) to
match the lower engine speed and so maintain
approximately the same road speed.
NOTE: It is recommended that the hand throttle is set

to maintain a minimum engine speed of 1000 rev/min
and the foot throttle is used when higher engine
speeds are required.
Down- Shift - Figure 86

Decrease engine speed, then depress the inching
pedal, simultaneously increasing engine speed by
pressing the foot throttle further down, then release the
inching pedal. The transmission will automatically select
a lower gear (provided 10th. gear is not already
selected) to match the higher engine speed.
AUTO SHIFT - Figure 87

Auto shift controls automatic speed shifting through
forward gears 10 - 18.
Auto shift can be engaged by depressing, then

86
releasing, the AUTO switch (1) on the right-hand
console while travelling in forward gear ratios of 10th.
and above at engine speeds of 1600 RPM or more.
When AUTO shift is engaged, the LCD digital display

will display an ‘A’ for AUTO (2) and show the gear
selected (3).
When in AUTO shift, the tractor will automatically

select higher gears whenever the engine speed
exceeds exceeds a predetermined speed. It will
select lower gears when the engine speed drops
below a predetermined speed.
To disengage AUTO shift and return to normal

shifting, depress the AUTO switch, then shift up or 2- 83
down with the shift control lever. 87
43
OPERATION
PROGRAMMABLE UP- SHIFT/DOWN- SHIFT
Figure 88
The transmission can be programmed to up- shift or
downshift 1, 2, or 3 gears when the switch (1) is
activated. This feature allows the operator to shift up
or down a predetermined number of gears on row
ends then return to the original gear when returning
to work.
The programmable downshift should be used to

reduce speeds in the field for crossing rough terrain
or climbing steep inclines.
88
The up- shift/downshift rocker switch (1) is located
beside the 3-point hitch fast raise/work switch (2).
See ‘3-Point Hitch Hydraulic Controls’. The use of
these features together allows quick turn around at
the end of the field.
Up- Shift - Figure 89

Up- shift is activated by depressing then releasing the
front of the switch. The transmission will automatically
shift up the preprogrammed number of gears. The
EIC dash Up- Shift lamp (1) will illuminate and the new
gear ratio will be displayed as shifts are completed.
To return to the original gear ratio, depress then

release the rear of the switch. The Up- Shift lamp will
go out and the tractor will shift down to the original
gear.
89
Down- Shift - Figure 89

Down- shift is activated by depressing then releasing
the rear of the switch. The transmission will auto-
matically shift down the predetermined number of
gears and the EIC Down Shift lamp (2) will illuminate
and the new gear ratio will be displayed as shifts are
completed.
To return to the original gear ratio, depress then

release the front of the switch. The Down- Shift lamp
will go out and the transmission will shift up to the
original gear.
NOTE: The programmable up- shift, downshift fea-

ture only functions in forward gears. The pro-
grammed change in gear ratios will occur whenever
the front or rear of the rocker switch is depressed.
44
SECTION 2
PROGRAMMING UP- SHIFT/DOWN- SHIFT
Figure 90
To change the number of gears increased or de-
creased when selecting the programmable up- shift
or downshift, proceed as follows:
• Turn the KEY-START switch off.
• Move the control lever to the reverse speed

position, then hold the lever to the left.
• While holding the lever to the left, turn on the

KEY-START switch (but do not start the engine.)
90
After three seconds, the digital display should
show ‘U-d’ indicating the up/downshift program-
ming mode is engaged.
• Return the control lever to the reverse position.
Figure 91
To programme the up- shift:
• With the shift lever still in reverse, move the lever
to the right and hold for three seconds. The digital
display will show an up arrow and the up- shift
number currently stored in the memory.
• With the shift lever still in reverse, nudge the lever

to the right one, two or three times, as required.
The display will show ‘1’, ‘2’ or ‘3’. This indicates
that when the up- shift switch is depressed, the
transmission will shift up one, two or three gear
ratios higher than the gear currently being used.
91
• Return the lever to neutral after selecting the
desired up- shift to store the programme.
• To cancel the up- shift programme, nudge the • With the shift lever still in reverse, nudge the lever
lever to the left until ‘0’ appears. to the right one, two or three times and the display
will show ‘1’, ‘2’ or ‘3’. This indicates the number
of gear ratios that will be down- shifted from the
Figure 91 current gear when the downshift switch is
To programme the downshift: activated.
• To change the number of gears that will be • Return the lever to neutral after selecting the
down- shifted when downshift is selected, posi- desired downshift to store the programme.
tion the shift lever in neutral. The display should
show ‘U-d’. Move the shift lever to reverse • To cancel the downshift programme, nudge the
position then to the left and hold for three lever to the left until ‘0’ appears.
seconds. The display will show a down arrow and
the downshift number currently stored in the Turn the key-switch to the off position to exit the
memory. up- shift and downshift programming mode.
45
OPERATION
PROGRAMMING REVERSE GEAR RATIOS

When changing from forward to reverse, the trans-
mission will normally select the same ratio in reverse
as was selected for forward travel (when operating in
gears between 2nd. and 10th.). For special shuttle
shift applications, Powershift offers the advantage of
automatically changing the reverse gear ratio up to
three ratios higher or lower than the engaged forward
gear ratio. The transmission may also be pro-
grammed to always select the lowest reverse gear
(R2).
Figure 92
To programme an alternative reverse gear, proceed
as follows:
• Turn the key-start switch off.
• Move the control lever to the reverse position,

then hold the lever to the right.
• While holding the lever to the right, turn on the

key-start switch (but do not start the engine).
Release the control lever after 5 seconds. The
digital display should show ‘0’ (unless the
transmission has previously been programmed to
select a higher or lower reverse gear.)
Figure 93 92
To programme a higher ratio:
• From the reverse position, nudge the lever to the

right one, two or three times, as required. The
display will show ‘1’, ‘2’ or ‘3’. This indicates that
when reverse is selected the gear will be one, two
or three ratios higher than the forward gear ratio.
Figure 93
To programme a lower ratio:
• From the reverse position, nudge the lever to the

left one, two or three times, the display will show
‘- 1’, ‘- 2’ or ‘- 3’. This indicates that when reverse
is selected the gear will be one, two or three ratios
lower than the forward gear. 93
46
SECTION 2
To programme the lowest gear:
• Nudge the lever to the left a fourth time, an ‘L’ will

be displayed. This means that whichever forward
ratio is engaged, when the lever is moved
rearward the lowest reverse ratio (2nd.) will
always be selected regardless of forward gear
ratio.
To cancel the programme:
From the reverse position, nudge the lever to the right

until ‘0’ is displayed.
NOTE: Remember that only reverse gears between

2nd. and 10th. are available.
To exit the programme:
• Turn the key-start switch off. The transmission is

now programmed.
CREEPER GEARS
CREEPER GEARS - Figure 94

Tractors can be equipped with 10.1:1 ratio creeper
gears for extra low ground speeds. The creeper
gears provide an additional 18 forward and 9 reverse
ratios.
When in the creeper range, the transmission display

will show ‘C’ for creep (1) and the gear ratio (2)
selected.
To engage creeper gears, place the transmission in

neutral, stop the tractor and depress the inching
pedal. Depress the top of the creeper switch (3)
engage a gear and release the inching pedal to
operate normally.
To disengage the creeper gear, stop the tractor,

depress the inching pedal, return the shift lever to
neutral and depress the bottom of the creeper switch.
IMPORTANT: The creeper gears offer very low

ground speeds. Do not use the low gearing to apply
excessive draft loads to the tractor. 94
47
OPERATION
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (FWD)
INTRODUCTION
Use four wheel drive (FWD) full time in the field to
obtain maximum efficiency and traction under any
field conditions. The FWD front axle is equipped with
a limited slip differential to keep both wheels pulling in
poor traction conditions.
ENGAGING AND DISENGAGING FOUR WHEEL

DRIVE - Figure 95
95
Four wheel drive can be engaged and disengaged in
all gears (forward and reverse) during operation and
under full load.
The switch (1) has three operating positions: Off,

Automatic and Full-time On.
Fully depress the rear of switch (1) to disengage FWD

- position (2).
Depress the front of the switch one notch to the AUTO

position (3). The AUTO FWD indicator lamp on the
instrument console will illuminate to indicate AUTO
engagement. FWD OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION: Four wheel drive greatly in-
When the tractor is in this mode, FWD will automati- creases traction. Extra caution is needed on
cally disengage when either brake pedal is used to slopes. Compared to two-wheel drive, a FWD tractor
assist in turning or at transport speeds above 15 MPH maintains traction on steeper slopes, increasing the
(24 km/h) for reduced tyre wear. The FWD will possibility of overturning.
automatically re-engage when transport speed drops
below 15 MPH (24 km/h) and when the applied foot When driving on icy, wet or gravel surfaces, reduce
brake is released. speed and make sure the tractor is correctly ballasted
to avoid skidding and loss of steering control. For best
Fully depress the front of the switch to the ON position control, engage four wheel drive by using Full-time
(4) to engage full-time FWD. The switch will illuminate On mode, rather than Auto mode for four wheel
to indicate that the FWD is engaged. braking.
In this mode FWD automatically disengages when IMPORTANT: To increase front tyre life, disengage four
transport speed is above 15 MPH (24 km/h) for wheel drive when transporting the tractor. Disengage-
reduced tyre wear. FWD will automatically re- engage ment is automatic at transport speeds above 15 MPH
when speeds drop below 15 MPH (24 km/h). (24 km/h). Always use front/rear tyre combinations
specified to ensure acceptable tyre wear.
NOTE: To assist in holding the tractor stationary,
FWD will automatically engage if the parking brake is IMPORTANT: Disengage four wheel drive when mak-
applied. For improved braking performance, FWD will ing tight turns. This action will increase front tyre life,
also automatically engage whenever both brake decrease stress on front axle components and allow the
pedals are depressed. tractor to achieve a minimum turning circle.
48
SECTION 2
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
Figure 96
A self-holding differential lock is installed in the rear
axle to lock the rear wheels together in conditions
where rear wheel slip is encountered.
To engage the differential lock, momentarily depress

the front (orange) part of the switch (1). The switch will
return to the centre position, but the differential lock
will be activated. The switch will illuminate to indicate 96
that the differential lock is engaged.
OPERATING THE ENGINE

WARNING: Never use the differential lock at
speeds above 5 MPH (8 km/h) or when turn- PREPARING TO START THE ENGINE
ing the tractor. When engaged, the differential lock will WARNING: Never idle the engine in a closed
prevent the tractor from turning. area. Exhaust gases, particularly carbon
monoxide, may build up. These gases are harmful
and potentially lethal.
IMPORTANT: If a rear wheel spins at high speed,
IMPORTANT: Never push or tow the tractor to start
reduce engine speed, to avoid shock loads to the
the engine. Doing so may damage the drive train.
driveline, before engaging the differential lock.
NOTE: A safety device prevents the starting motor
from operating unless the Powershift transmission
To disengage the differential lock, momentarily de- control lever is in neutral. The LCD will flash ‘F’ or ‘R’
press the rear part of the switch once. The lock will if the transmission is not in neutral.
remain engaged until traction at the rear wheels CAUTION: Ensure everyone is clear of the
equalises, until either of the foot brakes is applied or tractor before starting the engine.
if ground speed exceeds 10 MPH (16 km/h).
Prior to starting the engine, carry out the following
procedure:
If the front of the switch is pressed twice within one 1. Sit in the driver’s seat.
second, the DIFF LOCK AUTO lamp on the instru- 2. Ensure the parking brake is firmly applied.
ment panel will be illuminated and the AUTO mode
will be selected. In this mode the differential lock will 3. Ensure the Powershift control lever is in the
disengage when the 3- point hitch fast raise/work ‘NEUTRAL’ position.
switch is activated to raise the 3- point linkage. The 4. Move the hydraulic lift control lever fully forward.
differential lock will automatically re- engage when
the 3- point linkage is lowered. WARNING: Check the area beneath the
equipment to make sure that no injury or
damage will be caused when equipment is lowered.
NOTE: In the AUTO mode, the differential lock will IMPORTANT: The high operating speed of the
disengage and re-engage if either foot brake is turbocharger makes it essential that adequate lu-
applied and then released. The differential lock will brication is available when the engine is started.
permanently disengage when ground speed ex- Therefore, idle the engine at 1000 rev/min for
ceeds 10 MPH (16 km/h). approximately one minute before driving the tractor.
49
OPERATION
STARTING THE ENGINE IN WARM WEATHER OR

WHEN ENGINE IS HOT - Figure 97
1. Open the throttle halfway.
2. Depress and hold down the inching pedal.
3. Turn the key-start fully clockwise to position (4)

and operate the starting motor for a maximum of 30
seconds or until the engine starts, whichever occurs
first, then allow the key to return to position (3).
4. When the engine starts, release the key and

return the throttle to the idle position. Check that all
warning lights extinguish and gauge readings are
normal. 97
IMPORTANT: After operating the starter for 30

seconds, allow the starter to cool for two minutes.
STARTING THE ENGINE IN COLD WEATHER

- Figures 97, 98 and 99
WARNING: Your tractor is equipped with
Thermostart cold weather starting aid. Do not
use ether with Thermostart installed. It will explode in
the intake manifold. If, in an emergency, it is neces-
sary to use ether, disconnect the Thermostart termi- 1
nal wire from the heater plug on the rear of the intake
manifold and insulate the free end of the wire.
If engine coolant temperature is below 20°C (68°F) it

will be advantageous to use Thermostart.
NOTE: Thermostart will only operate below 20°C 98

(68°F).
1. Open the throttle halfway.
2. Depress and hold down the inching pedal.
3. Turn the key-start clockwise to position (3) Figure

97.
4. Momentarily depress the Thermostart switch (1)

Figure 98. The cold start indicator lamp (1) Figure 99,
will illuminate and remain alight for approximately 10
seconds. There are two ways of proceding:
5a) Allow the Thermostart to pre-heat, then when the

light goes out, turn the key fully clockwise to position
(4) Figure 97. Crank the engine until it starts but do not
operate the starting motor for more than 30 seconds.
Alternatively: 99
50
SECTION 2
5b) Start cranking the engine at any time up to 30

seconds after pressing the Thermostart switch. The
Thermostart will automatically cut in and out during
cranking. The warning light on the instrument panel
will illuminate as the Thermostart cuts in and extin-
guish when it cuts out.
6. If the engine does not start after a total of 30

seconds of cranking, allow the starter to cool for two
minutes, then repeat steps 1 to 4 and step 5b. The
pre-heat (step 5a) will not operate a second time
during any one cold start sequence.
100
7. When the engine starts, release the key and
return the throttle to the idle position. Check that all
warning lights extinguish and gauge readings are
normal.
NOTE: An electrical engine coolant heater is

installed, to aid starting in very cold conditions. An
hydraulic oil heater is also available as an option.
Read the detailed information on the use of each aid
in the following headings before attempting to start
the engine in cold weather.
ENGINE COOLANT HEATER - Figure 100

The engine coolant heater (1) warms the engine
coolant to aid starting by reducing engine drag. When
used with Thermostart, the heater is an effective
starting aid in temperatures down to - 29° C (- 20° F). 101
To operate the heater, plug the heater cord (2) into a

suitable 115 or 230 volt circuit, as appropriate, for at
HYDRAULIC OIL HEATER (where fitted) - Figure
least four hours before starting the tractor.
101
The sump heater will help to keep the hydraulic oil at
You can leave the heater connected for longer than a warm temperature which aids cold weather starting.
four hours without damage, but maximum starting The heater is installed in the left side of the rear axle
ability is usually attained after the coolant has been assembly. To operate the heater, plug the heater cord
heated for four hours. (1) into a suitable 115 or 230 volt circuit, as appropri-
ate.
WARNING: To avoid shocks or other injuries, WARNING: To avoid shocks or other injuries,
never use an unearthed or inadequate exten- never use an unearthed or inadequate exten-
sion cord. Always use an earthed 3-wire extension sion cord. Always use an earthed 3-wire extension
cord with a 3-pin plug which is rated for at least a cord with a 3-pin plug which is rated for at least a
15-ampere load and is protected by a suitable fuse or 15-ampere load and is protected by a suitable fuse or
circuit breaker. circuit breaker.
51
OPERATION
STARTING THE TRACTOR WITH JUMP LEADS -

Figure 102
WARNING: Operate the starting motor only
from the driver’s seat. If the key- start switch
is by- passed, the engine may start inadvertently in
gear and cause sudden and unexpected movement
of the tractor or a tractor runaway which may cause
serious injury. Wear eye protection when starting the
tractor with jump leads or when charging the battery.
If it is necessary to use jump leads to start the tractor,

use only heavy duty leads. Proceed as follows:
• Connect one end of the red jump lead to the

tractor starter motor positive (+) terminal (1) and
the other end to the auxiliary battery positive (+) 102
terminal (2).
• Connect one end of the black jump lead to the

auxiliary battery negative (- ) terminal (3) and the
other end to the tractor frame earth terminal (4).
Follow the starting procedure previously de-
scribed.
• When the engine starts allow it to run at idle

To stop the engine, carry out the following procedure:
speed, turn on all electrical equipment (lights,
etc.). This will help protect the alternator from
possible damage due to extreme load changes. • Sit in the driver’s seat.
Disconnect the jump leads in the reverse order to
the connecting procedure. • Close the throttle.
• Ensure that the parking brake is firmly applied.

IMPORTANT: When using an auxiliary battery to start
the engine, ensure that the polarity of the jump leads
• Move the Powershift lever to neutral.
is correct - positive to positive, negative to
negative. Reversed polarity may damage the electri-
cal system. • Ensure that the P.T.O. is disengaged.
• Place all remote control valve levers in the neutral

position.
STOPPING THE ENGINE

IMPORTANT: Before stopping, idle the engine at • Turn the key- start switch off.
1000 rev/min for approximately one minute. This will
allow the turbocharger and manifold to cool and • Move the hydraulic lift control lever fully forward
prevent possible distortion of components. to lower all hydraulic equipment to the ground.
52
SECTION 2
RUNNING- IN PROCEDURE • When driving on public roads, have consideration

Your new tractor will provide long and dependable for other road users. Pull in to the side of the road
service if given proper care during the 50 hour occasionally to allow any following traffic to pass.
running- in period and if serviced at the recom-
mended intervals. • Dip the tractor headlights when meeting an
oncoming vehicle on public roads at night. Keep
Avoid overloading the engine. Operating in too high a the lights adjusted so they do not blind the
gear under heavy load may cause excessive engine operator of an oncoming vehicle.
overloading. Overloading occurs when the engine
will not respond to a throttle increase. • Engage the inching pedal slowly when driving out
of a ditch, gully or up a steep hillside. Disengage
the inching pedal promptly if the front wheels rise
Do not operate without a load on the engine. This can
off the ground.
be as harmful to the engine as overloading. Vary the
type of operation undertaken so that the engine is
subjected to heavy as well as light loads during the • Reduce speed before turning or applying the
running- in period. brakes. Lock the brake pedals together when
travelling at high speed or on the public roads.
Brake both wheels simultaneously when making
Use the lower gear ratios when pulling heavy loads an emergency stop.
and avoid continuous operation at constant engine
speeds. Operating the tractor in too low a gear with a
• Never apply the differential lock when turning.
light load and high engine speed will waste fuel. You
will save fuel and minimise engine wear by selecting
• Use extreme caution and avoid hard application
the correct gear ratio for each particular operation.
of the tractor brakes when pulling heavy, towed
loads at road speeds.
Check the instruments frequently and keep the
radiator and various oil reservoirs filled to the • Towed loads that weigh more than the weight of
recommended levels. the tractor should have brakes for safe operation.
Ensure compliance with local regulations.
DRIVING THE TRACTOR • Always sit in the driver’s seat while starting or
WARNING: Observe the following precau- driving the tractor.
tions when driving the tractor:
• Watch where you are going - especially at row ENGINE SHUTDOWN OVERRIDE SWITCH
ends, on roads and around trees. (where fitted) - Figure 103
This feature will automatically shut down the engine
• Use extreme caution when operating on steep within 30 seconds if engine or transmission oil
slopes. pressure falls below predetermined levels or if engine
coolant or transmission oil temperature rises above
• Keep the tractor in gear when going downhill. Use predetermined levels. This feature protects the en-
a low gear to maintain control with minimum gine and drivetrain of an unattended tractor carrying
braking. out stationary P.T.O. work.
• If the tractor is stuck, reverse out to prevent WARNING: The engine shutdown feature is
overturning the unit. fully automatic. It can be overridden by the
operator to drive the tractor to a safe location. The
• Always use the drawbar or lower links in the override switch is to the right of the steering column
lowered position for pull- type work. Do not pull and should only be used to move the tractor far
from any other part of the tractor since it may tip enough to avoid a dangerous situation, such as on a
backward. railway crossing or in traffic, etc.
53
OPERATION

Before shutdown occurs, the word ‘STOP’ will flash in
the instrument cluster centre display and a pulsating
alarm will sound.
The override switch (1) is provided to allow the

operator to override the automatic shutdown.
The switch should only be used to move the tractor to

a safe area for investigation and repair.
Push the top of the switch to override the shutdown

system. The switch will be illuminated when the
switch is activated. 103
Push the bottom of the switch to return to normal

automatic shutdown operation.
IMPORTANT: Determine and correct the cause of the

shutdown before resuming operation.
INDEPENDENT POWER TAKE-OFF

(P.T.O.) 190 h.p. tractors have a 1000 rev/min PTO. A
21-spline shaft is supplied with the tractor. An
alternative 20-spline shaft is available as a dealer-
INTRODUCTION installed accessory.
Independent power take-off (PTO) transfers engine
power directly to mounted or trailed equipment.
210 and 240 h.p. tractors have a 1000 rev/min PTO.
‘Independent’ means that the PTO may be engaged,
A 20-spline shaft is supplied with the tractor. An
operated and disengaged with the tractor stationary
alternative 21-spline shaft is available as a dealer-
or moving.
installed accessory.
The PTO is electrically activated and has automatic

The 21-spline shaft has a diameter of 1.375″ (34.9
PTO clutch feathering for smooth engagement and
mm) while the 20-spline shaft is 1.75″ (44.5 mm) in
braking.
diameter.
NOTE: The PTO will automatically disengage when

the engine is stopped.
PTO GUARD - Figure 104
170 h.p. tractors have two speed PTO capability. For The PTO guard (1) is adjustable to three positions by
540 rev/min operation, a 6-spline shaft is supplied. A placing the prop rod (2) in positions A, B or C.
21-spline shaft is supplied for 1000 rev/min operation.
An alternative 20-spline shaft is available as an Position A - Guard is level. Use this position during
accessory. normal PTO operation.
The 6-spline shaft is used to operate equipment having Position B - Guard is tilted upward. Only use this
a power requirement up to 65 h.p. The 20- or 21-spline position while attaching implement PTO shaft to the
shaft should be installed if it is required to operate tractor. Lower the guard to position A after the shaft is
equipment having a higher power requirement. attached.
54
SECTION 2
Position C - Guard is tilted downward. Use this

position to provide clearance for the top link when
non-PTO implements are attached.
WARNING: Never stand on the PTO guard

during PTO operation.
NOTE: The cap (3) protects the PTO shaft when the
PTO is not in use. Unscrew and remove the cap in
order to couple up an implement to the PTO shaft.
CHANGING THE PTO OUTPUT SHAFT (170 h.p. 104

tractors only) - Figure 105
Change the PTO shaft, as required, for use with 540
or 1000 PTO rev/min implements.
WARNING: Before changing the PTO shaft:
• Park the tractor so the rear end is approximately

4 in. (10 cm) higher than the front end. This will
reduce oil loss when removing the shaft.
• Apply the parking brake.
• Move the Powershift lever to neutral.
• Disengage the PTO by pushing the PTO selector

knob down.
• Stop the engine.
• Ensure the PTO shaft has stopped turning.
To change the PTO shaft, remove the circlip (1) Figure

105 from the outer sleeve (2) and pull the shaft (3)
from the housing. Protect the removed shaft from
damage by wrapping it in a cloth and store safely.
Clean the replacement shaft. Make sure that the

lubrication hole in the side of the shaft is not blocked.
Install the replacement shaft and re-install the circlip.
IMPORTANT: Never operate the tractor with the PTO

shaft removed. The shaft acts as a support for internal
gearing. Operation with the shaft removed may result
in severe damage. 105
55
OPERATION
ATTACHING EQUIPMENT TO THE PTO SHAFT -

Figures 106 and 107
Mount or hitch the equipment to the tractor as outlined
in either ‘3-Point Hitch Linkage’ or ‘Towing Attach-
ments and Drawbar’ later in this section.
1. With the engine stopped, all equipment lowered,

and the PTO stopped, unscrew the PTO shaft cap (3)
Figure 106.
2. Attach the equipment drive shaft (3) Figure 107 to

106
the tractor PTO shaft (4). Ensure that the equipment
drive shaft coupler lock pin (1) engages the PTO shaft
lock groove (2). If the coupler does not have a lock,
pin the coupler to the shaft.
3. Mounted Equipment Only: Raise and lower the

linkage and check for interference. Make sure the
PTO shaft is not binding in the fully raised position. If
necessary, set the height limit control knob on the
right-hand console to limit the height to which the
3-point linkage will raise. Also study the instructions
in ‘3-Point Hitch Controls’.
4. Trailed Equipment Only: Ensure that the drawbar

is fixed in the centre position and that the drawbar is
set at the correct length for the PTO speed selected.
See ‘Towing Attachments and Drawbar’.
5. Position the PTO guard (1) Figure 106, in the

proper position before operating the PTO.
6. Check that the PTO driveline is not overextended,

bottomed out or at an excessive angle and that the
driveline shield does not contact the PTO guard or
drawbar.
IMPORTANT: Before operating PTO-driven equip-

ment, check to make sure the driveline will not bottom
out or become disengaged. Use the following dia-
grams (Figure 108) to determine correct PTO shaft
engagement: 107
56
SECTION 2
PTO OPERATION Pull drive halves

apart until fully ex-
WARNING: Whenever operating PTO tended, just before
they come com-
equipment observe the following safety pre- pletely apart. This
DIM ‘A’
cautions: is dimension ‘A’.
From dimension
‘A’, subtract 6 in.
(150 mm). This is
• Follow the equipment operator’s manual DIM ‘B’ dimension ‘B’.
instructions. IMPORTANT:
Never operate
6 in. equipment with the
driveline extended
past dimension ‘B’.
• Do not wear loose clothing when operating PTO
equipment.
Push drive halves
together as far as
DIM ‘C’ possible. This is di-
mension ‘C’. Add 1
• When operating PTO driven equipment, stop the in. (25 mm) to di-
mension ‘C’ to es-
engine and wait until the PTO shaft and tablish dimension
equipment stops before getting off the tractor and ‘D’.
working on the equipment.
108 DIM. ‘D’ = DIM. ‘C’ + 1 in.
• Do not clean or adjust PTO driven equipment IMPORTANT: Never operate equipment with the
while the tractor engine is running. driveline collapsed shorter than dimension ‘D’.
• Be sure that the PTO guard is installed.
• Always apply the tractor parking brake and block

the rear wheels front and back when operating
stationary PTO equipment.
Adjusting PTO Speed
Operate equipment at the correct PTO speed. PTO
• Do not work under any equipment which is speed is directly related to engine speed. Adjust
supported only by the hydraulic lift or remote engine speed as follows:
cylinder. Always use suitable blocking or
supports.
PTO Speed (rev/min) Engine Speed (rev/min)
540 (170 h.p. tractors only 1880

• Always replace the PTO shaft cover when the
PTO is not being used.
1000 (all models) 1900
NOTE: If the operator leaves the seat while the PTO IMPORTANT: Do not operate equipment above the
is operating, the PTO warning alarm will sound for five recommended PTO speed.
seconds and the PTO lamp will flash.
NOTE: The PTO has a non-critical overspeed alert.
If the 540 PTO is allowed to exceed 630 rev/min or the
The PTO brake will remain applied as long as the 1000 PTO exceeds 1152 rev/min, the ‘PTO ON’ status
engine is running and the PTO is off. When the engine lamp will flash and a 1-second audible alarm will
is shut off, the brake will release so the PTO shaft can sound. The green system status lamp will also flash
be turned by hand when attaching equipment. when the PTO ‘overspeed’ alarm sounds.
57
OPERATION
Engaging the PTO - Figure 109

1. Attach the equipment as outlined in ‘Attaching
Equipment to the PTO Shaft’.
2. With the PTO disengaged, start the engine.
3. With the engine speed at idle, engage the PTO by

depressing the centre button (1) on the PTO knob (2).
Pull the knob upwards to the stop, then release the
knob. When the PTO is activated, the PTO status
lamp (3) will be illuminated, together with the PTO
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster.
109
WARNING: Do not approach or work on the
PTO shaft or equipment with the PTO in mo-
tion. Shut off the tractor engine and the PTO before
working on the PTO or equipment. If the operator
leaves the seat while the PTO is engaged, the PTO
lamp in the EIC will flash and the audible alarm will
sound for 5 seconds.
4. Operate the PTO at a lower speed to make sure

the equipment is free of obstructions.
5. Gradually bring the engine up to operating speed.

Operate the engine at 1900 rev/min for 1000 rev/min
PTO equipment and 1880 rev/min for 540 rev/min
PTO equipment. Make sure the equipment is operat-
ing properly.
6. Select the appropriate gear ratio and enter the

work area.
Disengaging the PTO - Figure 109

To disengage the PTO, reduce engine speed to 1000
rev/min then fully depress and release the PTO IMPORTANT: If PTO equipment becomes blocked,
knob (1). stop the tractor and wait for the equipment to clear
itself. If the equipment does not clear itself or if the
PTO clutch slips, immediately disengage the PTO by
NOTE: Independent PTO is controlled only by the depressing the PTO knob (1) then stop the engine.
PTO control knob. The operation of the clutch pedal Wait until the PTO stops before leaving the tractor or
does not affect PTO operation. working on the equipment.
IMPORTANT: Always disengage the PTO before WARNING: To avoid inadvertent movement
making sharp turns and before raising mounted of a PTO-driven implement, always disen-
equipment to its fully raised position. gage the PTO after use.
58
SECTION 2
REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS INTRODUCTION

WARNING: Hydraulic oil escaping under
pressure can penetrate the skin causing
serious injury.
• Use a piece of cardboard or paper, instead of your

hand, to search for leaks.
• Stop the engine and relieve pressure before

connecting or disconnecting lines.
110
If any fluid is injected into the skin, obtain medical

attention immediately or gangrene may result.
Two different types of hydraulic remote control valve

systems are used:
STANDARD FLOW SYSTEM

The standard flow system consists of a single axial
piston pump which supplies fluid to a hydraulic
steering flow divider and remote control valve assem-
bly. The pump is rated at 26 Imp. galls/min (117
litres/min).
MEGAFLOW SYSTEM - Figure 110

The MegaFlow system consists of two axial piston
pumps which supply fluid to the high pressure
hydraulic system. The system has a total flow rating
of 46 Imp. galls/min (208 litres/min). The remote
control valve assembly is divided internally into two
separate systems.
The MegaFlow system offers increased flow and dual

The upper pump (1) is the same pump used on the system capability which will allow for more efficient
standard hydraulic system. It is rated at 26 Imp. operation of large individual hydraulic loads such as
galls/min (117 litres/min) and supplies fluid to the dual orbital motors and remote cylinders.
hydraulic steering flow divider and to remote valve
sections I and II. One side of the system can be used for the operation
of a high flow/low pressure requirement, and the other
The lower axial piston pump (2) is rated at 20 Imp. side of the system can be used for a low flow/high
galls/min (91 litres/min) and supplies fluid to the pressure requirement such as found on certain
three-point hitch valve and remote valves III and IV. hydraulically driven air seeders .
59
OPERATION
REMOTE CONTROL VALVES - Figure 111

Remote control valves are available to operate
external hydraulic cylinders, motors, etc. Up to four
remote control valves may be installed. The valves
are located at the rear of the tractor.
Tractors with a standard hydraulic system can be

equipped with two, three or four remote valves.
MegaFlow tractors will be equipped with four remote
valves as standard.
The lower control valve (1) Figure 111, has priority

over the remaining valves. Load check-valves are
installed in the ‘extend’ port of the lower two control
valves. 111
Standard Flow System

After valve No. I has been satisfied, priority goes to
the 3- point hydraulic lift, then in a descending order
to valves, IV, III and II (where fitted).
Megaflow System
After valve No. I has been satisfied, priority goes to
valve II. The oil from the Megaflow pump satisfies the
3- point hydraulic lift, then in a descending order to
valves, IV and III. Priority is affected by the flow
control valve settings. See ‘Flow Control Adjustment’
later in this section.
NOTE: The total system flow is not available to

operate any one single hydraulic circuit. The maxi-
mum available flow from any one remote valve is 20.5
Imp. galls/min (93 litres/min). 112
CONTROL VALVE LEVERS - Figure 112

The valves are operated by levers on the right-hand
console. The number on each control lever shown in
Figure 112 corresponds to the number on the valve in
Figure 111 that each lever controls. In addition, each
lever and it’s corresponding valve are colour coded:
Lever/valve I Green
Lever/valve II Blue
Lever/valve III Brown
Lever/valve IV Grey
Rotary lockout gates (6) are provided for each lever.
Figure - 113
The remote control valve operating levers have four
positions: neutral, extend, retract, and float. 113
60
SECTION 2
Pull the lever back from the neutral position (1) to the
‘extend’ (raise) position (2). From neutral, push
forward to the ‘retract’ (lower) position (3). Push the
lever fully forward to the float position (4). Float will
permit the cylinder to extend or retract allowing
equipment such as scraper blades to ‘float’ or follow
the ground contour.
The ‘float’ position is also used for retracting a

single-acting cylinder and for the OFF position when
operating hydraulic motors.
The extend and retract positions are identified by

symbols on a decal adjacent to the control levers.
114
An adjustable pressure release detent will hold the
lever in the selected extend or retract position until the
remote cylinder reaches the end of its stroke, then the
control lever will automatically return to neutral. The
lever may also be returned to neutral manually. The
lever will not return automatically to neutral from the
float position.
NOTE: Do not hold or fasten the lever in the extend

or retract position after a remote cylinder has reached
the end of its stroke. This will overheat the oil and may
lead to failure of hydraulic and driveline components.
ROTARY LOCKOUT GATES

Each control lever has a lockout gate operated by a
thumbwheel. The gate can prevent or limit travel of
the control lever to:
• Prevent movement from neutral

115
• Lockout float
• Lockout raise and neutral (for hydraulic motor

operations).
Figure 114
With the gate (1) rotated full clockwise, the control
lever is locked in the neutral position (2).
Figure 115
Rotate the gate one notch anti-clockwise and the
lever can be positioned in the retract (1), neutral (2)
or extend (3) positions. Float is locked out.
Figure 116
Rotate the gate one more notch anti-clockwise and
the lever can travel through all positions. 116
61
OPERATION
Figure 117
Rotate the gate further anti-clockwise to the last notch
to lock out neutral and extend positions. This notch
allows operation of hydraulic motors.
NOTE: Do not manually restrain a lever to override

the detent release for continuous operation or
excessive noise and detent damage may occur.
FLOW CONTROL ADJUSTMENT - Figure 118

Each control valve has a flow control valve to meter
oil flow. The flow controls are mounted on the cab
frame at the rear window opening. Each control is 117
actuated by a knob and controls flow up to the
maximum output at any one valve of 20 Imp. galls/min
(91 litres/min).
Turn the flow control knob anti-clockwise, toward the

wider portion of the decal (5), to increase the rate of
oil flow. Turn the knob clockwise, toward the narrow
portion of the decal, to decrease rate of flow.
NOTE: The flow control valves become harder to turn

as the hydraulic system hydraulic pressure
increases. Move the control valve lever to neutral to
reduce the effort required to turn the flow control knob.
Each decal is colour coded for identification with the

valve it controls.
PRESSURE RELEASE DETENT ADJUSTMENT - 118

Figure 119
Each valve has a detent adjustment screw (1) that
may be adjusted to vary the system pressure required
to return the control lever automatically to the neutral
position.
The adjustment screws are located on the left-hand

side of each valve.
To adjust, loosen the lock nut (2) and turn the screw
(1) in (clockwise) to increase detent release
pressure. Turn the screw out (anti-clockwise) to
decrease pressure. A flow meter should be used to
slowly raise system pressure to accurately set each
detent. It is recommended that this adjustment be
carried out by your authorised dealer.
NOTE: The factory pressure release detent

adjustment setting is 2250 lbf. in 2 (155 bar). 119
62
SECTION 2
WARNING: Before connecting or discon-

necting hydraulic hoses at the remote cylin-
ders, stop the engine and relieve the pressure in the
circuit by moving the remote control valve lever(s) ful-
ly forward to the ‘float’ position. Make sure that oil con-
tained within the remote cylinders is clean and is of
the correct grade. Make sure no one will be injured by
moving equipment when relieving pressure in the
system. Before disconnecting cylinders or equip-
ment, make sure the equipment or implement is sup-
ported securely.
WARNING: Never work under equipment 120

supported by a hydraulic device because it
may drop if the control is actuated (even with the en-
gine stopped) or in the event of hose failure, etc. Al-
ways use a secure support for equipment which must
be serviced while in the raised position.
LOW PRESSURE RETURN CIRCUIT - Figure 120

A low pressure return circuit is available by removing
the 11/16- 12 threaded plug (1) and installing a coupler
(2). The low pressure return circuit will reduce back
pressure in the remote hydraulic return line which will
result in more efficient hydraulic motor operation. The
return circuit can also be used in applications where
low return oil pressure is desired to improve imple-
ment operation such as orbital motor case drain lines.
121
Connect the return line from the hydraulic motor or
implement to the coupler.
The couplers will accept standard 1/2 in. SAE or ISO

NOTE: Connectors and couplers are available from tips. The couplers may be connected or dis-
your authorised dealer. connected under pressure. However, the effort
required to disconnect a coupler is in proportion to
system pressure. Moving the control valve lever to
neutral will will ease removal and installation of a
QUICK COUPLERS - Figure 121 coupler.
Each control valve has a pair of self-sealing, leverless
quick couplers to facilitate remote cylinder connec- To connect a remote cylinder hose, open the coupler
tion. These couplers also permit remote cylinder dust cap. Clean, then insert the male coupler making
hoses to be pulled from the coupler if an implement sure the coupler is correctly seated.
should become disconnected from the tractor. The
left couplers (1) are identified by an extended cylinder Actuate the remote valve to supply hydraulic
symbol moulded in the dust cap. The right couplers pressure which will complete the hydraulic coupling
(2) are identified by a retracted cylinder symbol. of the tractor and implement.
63
OPERATION
CONNECTING SINGLE-ACTING CYLINDERS With the remote control valve lever fully forward in the
Connect the hose from a single-acting cylinder to the ‘float’ position, the motor will be stationary. The
left-hand extend/raise coupler on the remote control hydraulic motor will operate if the lever is pulled back
valve, as previously described. to the ‘retract’ position. To stop the motor, move the
lever from the retract position to the float position. The
To extend a single-acting cylinder, pull the control float position will allow the motor to come slowly to a
lever back to the ‘extend’ position. halt, so preventing damage to the motor.
Manually return the lever to the neutral position to Observe the following to further protect the tractor
stop the cylinder before it is fully extended or allow the and equipment.
valve to return to neutral automatically when the
cylinder reaches the end of it’s stroke. • Do not open any bypass valve in the equipment
or motor. Use the flow control valve to control the
To retract a single-acting cylinder, move the lever fully rate of flow or speed of the motor.
forward to the ‘float’ position.
• Do not hold the remote control valve lever to
operate the equipment. If the detent will not hold
CONNECTING DOUBLE-ACTING CYLINDERS the lever in the retract position, check the
Connect the feed hose from a double-acting cylinder equipment for proper adjustment or contact your
to the left-hand extend/raise coupler on the remote dealer for assistance in adapting the equipment
control valve and the return hose to the right-hand to suit the tractor.
retract/lower coupler, as previously described. To
extend a double-acting cylinder, pull the control lever • To ensure optimum hydraulic oil cooling, operate
back to the ‘extend’ position. continuous flow equipment at the highest flow
setting (by use of the flow control valve) and
To retract a double-acting cylinder, push the control lowest engine speed that will give the required
lever forward, past neutral, to the ‘retract’ position. machine performance and speed.
Further forward movement of the lever will select
‘float’ which will allow the cylinder to extend or retract • Do not use remote control valve No. I to operate
freely. This feature is very helpful when carrying out continuous flow equipment that requires more
work with equipment such as scraper blades and than 2000 lbf. in2 (138 bar). If continuous
loaders. pressure is too high it may shut down the rest of
the system. Use valve II, III or IV to operate such
equipment.
OPERATING CONTINUOUS FLOW HYDRAULIC
EQUIPMENT
Continuous flow hydraulic equipment (e.g., hydraulic OPERATING REMOTE EQUIPMENT SIMULTA-
motors) should be connected to the first (lowest) NEOUSLY OR REMOTE EQUIPMENT AND HY-
remote control valve couplers with the pressure hose DRAULIC LIFT SIMULTANEOUSLY
connected to the right-hand retract coupler and the NOTE: Hydraulic pump output varies with engine
return hose connected to the left-hand extend/raise speed. Oil flow will be relatively constant in the remote
coupler. control valve circuits if the flow control valve is used
to provide reduced oil flow, thus providing constant
NOTE: The first valve has priority over the remaining operating speed for hydraulic motors, etc., even if
valves. This will ensure a constant flow of oil to the engine speed varies. Maintain the engine speed
motors. above the minimum required for simultaneous
operation of all required circuits and vary ground
Use the flow control to regulate the motor speed. No.
speed by selection of the appropriate gear ratio.
I flow control valve should be used to regulate the
motor speed. If the flow control valve is opened too If operating two or more remote control valves
far, the 3- point linkage or other remote valves will simultaneously or remote valves and hydraulic lift, all
slow down or stop. This will ensure that the hydraulic the flow control valves should be adjusted to provide
system will only supply the oil required by the motor. a partial flow. Otherwise, all the available flow may be
Extra pump capacity will not be used except when directed to the full flow circuit when the pressure in
other remote valve sections are operated. that circuit is less than that of the other circuits in use.
64
SECTION 2
BLEEDING REMOTE CYLINDERS

When connecting a cylinder with trapped air, i.e., a
new cylinder, one that has been out of service or one
that has had the hoses disconnected, it will be
necessary to bleed the cylinder to remove the air.
With the hoses connected to the remote control valve

couplers at the rear of the tractor, position the cylinder
with the hose end uppermost and extend and retract
the cylinder seven or eight times using the remote
control valve operating lever. Check the rear axle oil
level before and after operating the remote cylinder.
122
WARNING: Do not operate the tractor until

you are thoroughly accustomed with the
location and operation of all controls.
THREE-POINT HITCH HYDRAULIC

CONTROLS
INTRODUCTION
The electro-hydraulic three-point hitch control
system employs electronic switches and a
microcomputer to control the hydraulic system which
123
raises and lowers the 3-point linkage.
CONTROLS - Figure 122

The electro-hydraulic three-point hitch control
system is operated from a console to the right of the
operator’s seat. The console houses the lift control
lever (1) and rotary control knobs (2) through (5)
An adjustable lift control lever stop (2) is located to the

right of the lift lever. The stop sets the lower or upper
travel of the lift lever. To adjust, loosen the stop knob
LIFT CONTROL LEVER - Figure 123 and slide the stop forward or rearwards to contact the
The lever (1) controls implement height or working lift lever in the desired position. Tighten the stop knob.
depth and, when pushed fully forward, activates
external fender mounted electrical switches. Pull the The stop should be placed in front of the lever when
lever rearward to raise the 3-point lift and push transporting implements, to prevent accidental
forward to lower. lowering of the implement.
65
OPERATION
POSITION/DRAFT SENSITIVITY CONTROL

KNOB - Figure 124
The position/draft sensitivity knob (1) is used to select
draft control, position control or a combination of the
two in order to make the system more or less sensitive
to changes in the draft loading. A decal encircling the
knob has six numbered positions to indicate the
degree of sensitivity selected. Turn the position/draft
sensitivity knob towards the full position control
setting (position 1) to decrease the system’s
response to a change in draft loading. The knob is
detented at the position control setting (knob fully
anti-clockwise).
124
Whenever draft control is selected, implement
operating depth will automatically vary to maintain a
constant load on the engine. If precise depth control
is required, use the full position control setting.
IMPORTANT: Always set the position/draft sensitivity

knob to the full position control setting (position 1) at
any time when not actually operating in draft control,
such as when attaching equipment, transporting
equipment or when no equipment is attached.
DROP RATE CONTROL KNOB - Figure 125

The drop rate control knob (1) controls the speed at
which the lower links and implement drop during a
lowering cycle. This knob also has a decal encircling 125
it with six numbered positions. Position 1 is the
slowest rate and is denoted by a ‘tortoise’ symbol.
Position 6 is the fastest setting, denoted by a ‘hare’
symbol.
HEIGHT LIMIT CONTROL KNOB - Figure 125

The height limit control knob (2) limits the height that
the linkage may be raised. Adjust this knob to avoid
the possibility of a large implement damaging the
tractor cab when fully raised.
Turning the knob fully anti-clockwise prevents the

3-point hitch from raising above mid height. Turning
the knob fully clockwise will allow the 3-point hitch to
raise to full height.
66
SECTION 2
THREE-POINT HITCH STATUS LIGHT - Figure

126
The status light (1) serves two purposes:
• A steady light signifies ‘hitch disabled’. The ‘hitch

disabled’ warning is also duplicated on the instru-
ment panel as an LCD symbol (1) Figure 127.
• A flashing light means that there is a malfunction

in the 3- point hitch system circuits.
126
Should a malfunction occur, consult your authorised

dealer.
HITCH STATUS LCD SYMBOLS - Figure 127

The ‘hitch disabled’ LCD symbol (1) and warning light,
signifies that the lift control lever position does not cor-
respond to the position of the lower links. The lower
link cannot be moved until the hitch is ‘captured’.
The ‘hitch disabled’ warning will display if:
• The lift control lever was inadvertently moved with

the engine stopped.
• When control of the hydraulic power lift has been

transferred to the external switches.
• The 3-point hitch arm position changed with the

engine stopped.
NOTE: To ‘capture the hitch’ and put the lift control le-
ver back in phase with the lower links, proceed as fol-
lows: 127
67
OPERATION
HITCH STATUS LCD SYMBOLS - Figure 128

1. Depress the front of the fast raise/work switch.
2. Pull the position control lever fully rearward.
3. Slowly move the position control lever forward

until the status light goes out and the ‘hitch
enabled’ symbol (3) appears.
The ‘hitch enabled’ symbol (3) is displayed to advise

the operator when the three- point linkage is in phase 128
with the lift control lever. In the event of the 3- point
linkage/lift control lever becoming out of phase with
one another, this symbol will disappear and the ‘hitch
disabled’ symbol (1) will display.
The digital display (2) on the instrument panel indi-

cates the position of the lower links over a scale of ‘0’
to ‘99’. A display of ‘0’ indicates that the links are fully
lowered and a display of ‘99’ indicates that they are
fully raised.
FAST RAISE/WORK SWITCH - Figure 129

The fast raise/work switch (1) allows the operator to
rapidly raise the implement to the position set by the
height limit control and to lower the implement back
down to the position set by the lift control lever, without
disturbing these settings.
This feature allows the operator to raise the

implement at the headland and return the implement
to the same operating conditions.
To raise the implement, press the rear of the switch.

Press the front of the switch to lower the implement to
the work position.
NOTE: The fast raise/work switch should be switched

to the raise position when transporting equipment.
The fast raise/work switch is also used to recapture
the hitch after using the external fender switches. 129
68
SECTION 2
SLIP LIMIT CONTROL KNOB (where fitted) - Fig-

ure 130
The slip limit control knob (1) is available only with the
optional radar sensor unit. It allows the operator to
select a wheel slip limit above which the implement
will raise until wheel slip is below the preset level. The
slip override lamp (2) is illuminated whenever the slip
exceeds the preset threshold and remains on until the
slip is reduced. The knob is detented at the ‘Off’
position (knob fully clockwise).
A digital display of wheel slip, and a slip alarm may be

programmed into the electronic instrument panel.
See ‘Electronic Instrument Cluster Programming’.
130
NOTE: Slip limit control will not operate below 0.5
MPH (0.8 km/h). Slip limit control will disengage when
the 3- point linkage is raised and re-engage when the
implement is lowered into the ground.
FIELD OPERATION - Figure 131

After attaching an implement to the three-point hitch,
adjust the height limit control knob (2) to prevent large
implements from damaging the tractor cab. Adjust the
drop rate control knob (3) to set the desired rate at
which the implement will drop when the hitch is
lowered.
To set the height limit control, proceed as follows:
• Turn the height limit control knob (2) fully

anti-clockwise which will allow the hitch to raise to
one-half its full height. 131
• Pull the lift control lever (1) fully to the rear.
• Slowly turn the height limit control knob (2)

clockwise to raise the implement until at least 4 in.
(100 mm) clearance remains between the tractor
and implement (or the maximum hitch height is
reached).
Adjust the rate of implement drop by rotating the drop

rate knob (3). Turn the knob clockwise to speed up the
drop rate or anti-clockwise to slow down the drop rate.
IMPORTANT: When first setting the implement up for

work, keep the drop rate control knob in the slow drop
position (‘tortoise’ symbol).
NOTE: The drop rate control only affects the lower

link/implement drop rate when the implement is not
engaging the ground.
69
OPERATION
POSITION CONTROL OPERATION - Figure 132

To operate in position control, use the 3-point hitch lift
control lever (1) Figure 132. Pull the lever rearward to
raise the 3-point hitch and push the lever forward to
lower the hitch. The EIC hitch position display (2) Fig-
ure 128, will show the hitch position.
NOTE: The full position control setting is not recom-

mended for soil-engaging implements.
132
Use the lift control lever (1) Figure 132, to set the re-
quired implement working height. Once the required im-
plement working height has been established, there is
no need to move the lift control lever again until the work
is completed. Upon reaching the headland, use the
raise/work switch to raise and lower the implement.
When the required implement height has been

established, loosen the knob on the adjustable lift
control lever stop (5) Figure 132 and move it so that
it is against the front edge of the lift control lever.
Re-tighten the knob. Whenever the lift control lever is
pulled rearwards to raise the implement, the
implement will always return to the same working DRAFT CONTROL OPERATION (where fitted) -
height when the lever is pushed forward to contact the Figure 132
stop. To operate in draft control, adjust the position/draft
sensitivity knob (4). The following table may be used
as a guide to help you adjust the settings to suit the
implement and field conditions:
NOTE: If required, the lift control lever may be eased
Implement Soil Position/Draft
sideways (to the left) to bypass the adjustable stop.
Knob
Fully-mounted clay soil 3-4
sandy soil 2-3
WARNING: When transporting equipment
Semi-mounted clay soil 5-6
on the three-point linkage, select position
sandy soil 4-5
control, raise the implement and set the adjustable
stop (5) against the front edge of the lift control lever to Position (6) on the position/draft sensitivity knob (fully
prevent accidental forward movement of the lever clockwise, decal indicating plough engaged with soil)
which could result in attached equipment lowering is the most sensitive draft setting and variations in soil
and becoming damaged, damaging the road surface density will cause the hydraulic system to respond
or causing personal injury. Set the raise/work switch with large movements of the linkage and attached
to the raise position as an additional transport lock. implement.
70
SECTION 2
Turning the position/draft sensitivity knob anti-clock- Once set, the tractor hydraulic system will automati-
wise (towards position 1) will progressively decrease cally adjust implement depth to maintain an even pull
the amount and rate of linkage movement relative to (draft load) on the tractor to reduce wheel slip to a
variations in soil density. minimum.
Drive the tractor into the field and lower the implement
by pushing the lift control lever (1) forward. The fur- Observe the implement as it pulls through the ground.
ther forward the lever is moved, the greater will be the If hydraulic system reaction is too great, reduce sys-
draft loading. In most circumstances, forward move- tem sensitivity by turning the position/draft sensitivity
ment of the lever will increase working depth, rear- knob (4) anti-clockwise by a few degrees. If imple-
ward movement will reduce working depth until the ment movement is still too great, progressively rotate
implement rises out of the ground. the knob anti-clockwise (towards the position control
setting) to further reduce sensitivity to a level suited
to the soil conditions.
NOTE: For good performance do not push the lift con-

trol lever too far forward and command too large a
draft load.
NOTE: For optimum draft control performance both
the lift control lever and the position/draft sensitivity
knob need to be set properly.
To set up the draft control system select the desired
position/draft sensitivity setting and, while travelling
through the field, use the lift control lever to lower the im-
plement to the required operating depth. Pull the lift con- NOTE: The full position control setting is not recom-
trol lever back until implement depth just starts to de- mended for soil-engaging implements.
crease. Make slight adjustments to both the lift control
lever and the position/draft sensitivity knob to achieve
the desired performance.
Once the required implement working depth has
been established there is no need to move the lift con-
trol lever again until the work is completed. Upon
NOTE: Changing the position/draft sensitivity knob reaching the headland, use the raise/work switch to
setting may require slight changes in the lift control le- raise and lower the implement.
ver position to maintain the desired implement work-
ing depth.
When the required implement depth has been estab-

Depending on the position of the lift control lever relative lished, loosen the knob on the adjustable lift control le-
to the lower links, the speed of lift will automatically ad- ver stop (5) and move it so that it is against the front
just. This means that if a large movement of the lift con- edge of the lift control lever. Retighten the knob.
trol lever is made then the lower links will respond by Whenever the lift control lever is pulled rearwards to
moving rapidly. As the links approach the position set by raise the implement, the implement will always return
the lift control lever, movement will slow. to the same working depth when the lever is pushed
forward to contact the stop.
NOTE: The drop rate control only affects the lower

link/implement drop rate when the implement is not NOTE: If required, the lift control lever may be eased
engaging the ground. sideways (to the left) to bypass the adjustable stop.
71
OPERATION
EXTERNAL 3-POINT HITCH CONTROLS Fig-

ure 133
WARNING: Before using the external 3-point
hitch control switches, ensure that no person
or object is in the area of the implement or three-point
linkage. Never operate the external switches while
standing:
• Directly behind the tractor.
• Between the lower links.
• On or near the implement.

133
Only operate switches while standing in the hatched
areas shown in Figure 133.
An external push-button switch (1) is provided on

each rear fender. The switches are spring-loaded to
return to the off position.
EXTERNAL SWITCHES - Figure 134

Before leaving the tractor to operate the external
switches:
1. Apply the parking brake.
NOTE: The external switches can only function if the

handbrake is applied.
2. Move the powershift control lever to neutral. 134
3. Disengage the PTO.
4. Move the hand throttle lever to the low idle position

(fully rearwards). Get out of the cab and press the
upper part (1) or lower part (2) of the external switch.
This will transfer control of the hydraulic power lift to
the rear fenders switches. The lift disabled symbol will
be displayed and the hitch status light will be
illuminated.
WARNING: Never extend arms, legs, any

part of the body or any object into the area
near the three-point linkage or implement while oper-
ating the external switch. Never have an assistant
working the opposite set of controls. When moving to
the opposite set of controls, move around the tractor
or implement. Do not cross between the implement
and tractor.
72
SECTION 2
Only activate the external switches while standing to

the side of the tractor as shown in, Figure 133.
Pressing the upper part of the switch (1) Figure 134,

causes the lift linkage to raise. Pressing the lower part
(2) causes the linkage to lower. Operate the switch
until the lower links align with the implement then re-
lease the switch and attach the implement to the three
point linkage in the normal manner.
NOTE: Operation of fender switches causes the hitch

to move at a slower, controlled rate.
135
FAST RAISE/WORK SWITCH - Figure 135

To transfer control back to the lift control lever:
1. Press the rear of the fast raise/work switch (1)

Figure 135, then press the front of the switch.
2. Push the lift control lever fully forward then move

the lever slowly rearwards to ‘capture’ the hitch. The
hitch enabled symbol will display, indicating that the
3- point linkage is in phase with the lift control lever.
3-POINT HITCH LINKAGE
INTRODUCTION - Figure 136

The tractor will accept category II, III, and III N
implements that conform to SAE-ASAE standard
dimensions.
136 3-Point Linkage

NOTE: Before attaching equipment read this section 1. Left-hand lift rod
carefully. 2. Top link
3. Top link transport hanger
4. Right-hand lift rod
5. Right-hand lift rod adusting handle
6. Right-hand lower link
When attaching mounted equipment to the 7. Sway blocks
three-point linkage, the following adjustments may be 8. Left-hand lower link
made to ensure satisfactory operation: 9. Left-hand lift rod adjusting handle
73
OPERATION
LIFT RODS - Figure 137

WARNING: Before disconnecting a lift rod
from the lower link. Lower attached equip-
ment to the ground and make sure the hydraulic con-
trol lever is fully down.
Stop the engine. Make sure attached equipment is

correctly supported before removing the lift rod
securing pin.
To adjust either lift rod (1) raise the adjusting handle

(2) and rotate it to lengthen or shorten the lift rod 137
assembly. To prevent rotation of the adjusting handle,
slip it down to engage on the locking pin (3) on the lift
rod end. For most implements adjust both lift rods so
the centres of the lower link balls are 10 in. (254 mm)
above the ground when the hitch is fully lowered.
Adjust the lift rods to level the equipment in the
operating position.
LOWER LINK FLOAT - Figure 138
Rigid Position
Both lift rods (3) have a lock plate (3) installed in the
clevis (1). If the lock plate is installed horizontally, the
3-point hitch will not have vertical float.
138
Float Position - Figure 139

If the lock plates are rotated to the vertical position (3),
the lower links (4) will be allowed to float up and down
by 1.5in (40 mm). This will allow an implement vertical
movement independent of the tractor.
139
74
SECTION 2
TOP LINK - Figure 140

The top link is adjusted by turning the sleeve (2) after
raising the handle/locking latch (3). To prevent further
rotation of the sleeve, push the handle/latch down to
engage in either of the two slots (1) in the threaded
end of the top link assembly.
Most equipment will operate at the proper height

when the link is adjusted to 28.5 in. (724 mm) mea-
sured between the centre of the attaching points. Re-
adjust to level the equipment, as required.
140
When not in use, the top link can be removed and

stored, or left in a vertical position and retained by the
transport hanger (3) Figure 136.
FLEXIBLE LINK ENDS (where fitted) - Figure 141
Attaching Position
Pull the lock pin (1) to release the link end (2) from the
lower link (3). Extend the link ends to make connect-
ing to the implement easier.
141
Operating Position - Figure 142

Secure the link ends to the equipment, then carefully
inch the tractor rearwards until the flexible link ends
(1) lock in the closed position and the lock pins (2)
lock in place.
Attach the top link after flexible ends are locked in the
lower links.
IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating the

equipment, make sure the flexible link ends are
locked in the operating position. Remove the drawbar
if it interferes with close-mounted equipment. 142
75
OPERATION
SWAY BLOCKS (where fitted) - Figures 143 and

144
The sway blocks control lower link sideways
movement in both the transport and operating
position to prevent the equipment swaying from side
to side. This is especially important when operating
on slopes or near fences, walls or ditches.
The sway blocks can be mounted in a rigid or sway

position.
The sway blocks (1) Figure 143, are pivoted at the top
and locked in one of two positions by means of the 143
pins (2) that pass through one of a pair of holes in the
drawbar hanger. The pins are secured by ‘R’ clips (3).
NOTE: The pins must always be installed so that the

clips are on the inside of the drawbar support.
Rigid Position - Figure 143

To prevent side movement of the equipment in both
the operating and transport positions, remove the ‘R’
clips (3) and pins (2) and swivel the sway blocks (1)
forward to the ‘rigid’ position. Secure in the ‘rigid’ posi-
tion (forward hole) by means of the pins and ‘R’ clips.
Sway Position - Figure 144

When it is desirable to have sideways movement of
the equipment in the operating position, but remain
rigid in the transport position, swivel the sway blocks
(1) rearward to the ‘sway’ position. Secure in the
‘sway’ position (rear hole) by means of the pins (2)
and ‘R’ clips (3).
IMPORTANT: When setting the sway blocks to

provide side-to-side movement, ensure that there is
no possibility of the rear tyres contacting the sway
blocks, lower links or implement.
WARNING: Never operate steerable

equipment unless the sway blocks are
installed and correctly adjusted to prevent excessive
lateral movement. 144
76
SECTION 2
GUIDE BLOCKS, SPACERS AND SHIMS

The guide blocks and spacers can be positioned so
the 3-point hitch will accept category II, category III N
or category III implements.
Shims are available to adjust the amount of lateral

movement between the sway blocks and the lower
links when the hitch is in the raised (transport) posi-
tion or when the sway blocks are in the rigid position.
See Figure 145 and Figure 146 for shim locations.
Category II or Category III N Position - Figure 145

Install the guide blocks (1) on the inside of the lower
links.
If necessary, adjust by placing an equal amount of

shims (2) on each lower link. Shim so the linkage can
be fully raised and lowered without binding when an
implement is attached. The adjustment must be made
with the sway blocks in the rigid position.
Category III Position - Figure 146

Position the guide blocks (1) and spacer (2) on the in-
side of the lower links. 145
If necessary, adjust by placing an equal amount of

shims (3) on each lower link. Shim so the linkage can
be fully raised and lowered without binding when an
implement is attached. The adjustment must be made
with the sway blocks in the rigid position.
LINKAGE CATEGORY CONVERSION

Tractors are equipped with Category III linkage. To
convert from Category III to Category II, bushings
may be inserted into the top link and lower link
implement connections. The guide blocks and
spacers must be repositioned, as previously
described. 146
77
OPERATION
WALTERSCHEID STABILISERS (where fitted) -

Figures 147 and 148
Walterscheid telescopic stabilisers may be fitted in
place of the sway blocks described previously.
WARNING: Never operate steerable equip-

ment unless the stabilisers are installed and
correctly adjusted to prevent excessive lateral move-
ment.
The stabilisers will control the sway of the lower links

and attached equipment when in work or when being
transported. This is especially important when
operating on slopes or near fences, walls or ditches
147
and with certain implements. Check your Implement
Operator’s Manual.
Figure 147
Each stabiliser consists of a telescopic tube
assembly internally threaded at the rear end. The
tube assembly is attached to a mounting bracket
bolted to the outer ends of the rear axle housing.
An externally threaded rod (3) is attached to the lower

links. The threaded rod engages with the screwed
thread in the tube assembly and the overall length of
the assembly is determined by screwing the rod in or
out, as required.
An adjustable chain (4) is attached, at one end, to

the rear fender and at the other end, via a spring, to
a hinged cover (1) on the telescopic part of the
stabiliser. A lug (2) on the telescopic part of the 148
stabiliser engages a notch in the cover.
When the chain is correctly adjusted it will be slack

when the lower links are raised from the operating
position, so allowing the cover to drop down over the
lug on the stabiliser. When the cover is down, as
shown, the stabiliser is locked at the preset length.
The lower links are, therefore, retained at a set
distance apart, preventing them (and attached
equipment) from swaying.
However, when the 3- point hitch is lowered into the Adjusting the Stabilisers
work position, the chain becomes taut and lifts the
cover from the stabiliser allowing it to telescope freely. Figure 148
The stabilisers (and implement) will then sway when In practice, the implement should be attached to the
engaged in the ground. This feature is useful as it three- point linkage with the cover (4) on both
provides greater implement control when turning on stabilisers raised, so as to allow the stabilisers to
the headlands of a field. telescope freely.
78
SECTION 2
Lift the locking/adjusting lever (2) up over the peg (1)

so that the lever is at right-angles to the stabiliser.
Turn the telescopic section, by means of the lever, so
that the threaded section (3) screws into or out of the
stabiliser. When the length is satisfactory, i.e., the
notch in the cover aligns with the lug on the stabiliser,
lower the lever back down over the peg and close the
cover.
The chain should then be adjusted, by placing the

appropriate link over the attaching hook, so that the
cover on the stabiliser is lifted when the implement is
lowered into work.
IMPORTANT: When setting the stabiliser length to

provide sway, ensure that there is no possibility of the
rear tyres fouling the stabilisers or lower links.
WALTERSCHEID HITCH (where fitted)

The Walterscheid hitch consists of a pair of lower links
and an adjustable top link, all of which have open claw
ends that permit rapid coupling and uncoupling of
implements. The claws are equipped with self-locking
latches to ensure positive retention of the tractor
linkage to the implement.
The stabilisers maintain the lower links at the width

setting required for the implement to be coupled.
Figure 149
149
The ball- bushings supplied with the quick- coupler kit
should be installed on the implement. The ball-
bushings with guide cones (2) should be installed on the
lower hitch pins. The plain ball- bushing (1) should be
installed on the upper hitch pin.
Coupling Implement to Tractor - Figure 150

Using the stabilisers or sway blocks, set the tractor
lower links the correct distance apart to align with the
two lower ball- bushings installed on the implement.
With the lower links fully lowered, the self- locking

latches closed and the top link raised, reverse the
tractor until the lower link claw couplers (2) are
beneath the implement hitch pins. The combination of
large claw openings and guide cones on the
implement ball- bushes make accurate alignment of
tractor to implement unnecessary. 150
79
OPERATION
Raise the lower links using the hydraulic lift lever until
the claw couplers engage the ball- bushes. An
audible click will be heard as the self- locking latches
engage the implement ball- bushes.
Lower the top link claw (1) onto the upper implement
ball- bush and press down until the latch is heard to
engage. If necessary, turn the sleeve on the top link
to increase or decrease top link length to suit.
The implement supports, where fitted, may now be 151

removed or retracted and the implement supported
on the three- point linkage.
Uncoupling Implement from Tractor - Figure 151 ATTACHING 3-POINT EQUIPMENT

Using the hydraulic lift control lever, fully lower the Before attaching equipment to your tractor:
implement to the ground ensuring that it cannot fall
when disconnected from the tractor. Use the Be sure the guide blocks are positioned to suit the
implement supports (where fitted). equipment as outlined under the ‘Sway Blocks’ and
‘Guide Blocks, Spacers and Shims’ headings or the
Walterscheid Stabilisers are installed and correctly
adjusted.
Pull the release cable on the top link to release the
claw from the implement hitch.
Remove the swinging drawbar, if close-mounted
equipment is being attached.
Fully lower the lower links by means of the hydraulic IMPORTANT: Always set the position/draft sensitivity
lift control lever. Pull the release rings (3) on both control knob in position control when attaching equip-
lower link claws up and forward (towards the tractor). ment, transporting equipment, when no equipment is
The latches will disengage and allow the links to lower attached or at any time when not operating in draft
and clear the implement. control.
NOTE: See also ‘External 3-Point Hitch Controls’ for

more details.
NOTE: Cables may be attached to the release rings
on the lower links to facilitate uncoupling of the
Most equipment can be attached to your tractor as fol-
implement without leaving the tractor seat. If installed,
lows:
ensure the release cables do not foul wheels, or
moving parts of the hydraulic linkage or implement.
1. Position the tractor so that the lower link hitch
points are level with and slightly ahead of the
implement hitch pins.
When not in use, hook the cables over the bracket
attached to the rear of the cab frame. 2. Stop the engine and engage the parking brake.
80
SECTION 2
With Flexible Link Ends drawbar. See ‘Attaching Equipment to the PTO Shaft’
3. Release the flexible link ends and slip the ends on heading in the ‘Independent PTO’ section for details.
the implement hitch pins. Secure with the linch
pins. Start the engine and slowly back the tractor IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or
up until the flexible link ends lock in the operating semi-mounted equipment to the 3-point linkage or
position. Stop the engine and engage the parking when attaching trailed equipment to the drawbar or
brake. hitch, ensure that there is adequate clearance
between the implement and the tractor. This is
IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating particularly important if the tractor is equipped with the
equipment, ensure that the flexible link ends (where SuperSteer front axle. The very sharp turning angles
fitted) are locked in the operating position. provided by the SuperSteer system may allow
semi- mounted or trailed equipment to interfere with
4. Lengthen or shorten the top link, until the the tractor rear tyres. Operators should be aware of
implement mast pin can be inserted through the this and take appropriate action, such as adjustment
mast and top link. Adjust the top link to the initial of steering stops, sway blocks or stabilisers.
28.5 in. (724 mm) setting.
Check the clearances in the raised position by raising
the implement carefully using the lift control lever in
With Walterscheid Hitch position control. Check the swing clearance by
5. With the lower links fully lowered, the self- locking performing a series of left- and right-hand turns with
latches closed and the top link raised, reverse the the tractor and implement combination.
tractor until the lower link claw couplers are
beneath the implement hitch pins. Raise the
lower links until the claw couplers engage the
ball- bushes. An audible click will be heard as the IMPLEMENT TO CAB CLEARANCE
self- locking latches engage the implement CAUTION: Some mounted and semi-
ball- bushes. mounted equipment may interfere with and
damage the cab.
6. Lower the top link claw onto the upper implement
ball- bush and press down until the latch is heard WARNING: You may be injured by broken
to engage. Turn the sleeve on the top link to glass or the cab ROPS may be damaged if
increase or decrease top link length to suit. Adjust equipment interferes with the cab.
the top link to the initial 28.5 in. (724 mm) setting.
To prevent cab damage, proceed as follows:
All Models 1. Attach the equipment as outlined previously.

7. Attach remote equipment, where applicable.
2. Check for adequate clearance by slowly raising

8. After attaching implement and before actual the equipment with the lift control lever in Position
operation check that: Control. If the equipment clears the cab by 4 in.
(100 mm) or more when fully raised, proceed to
• No interference occurs with tractor components. operate the equipment.
• The top link does not contact the PTO guard with
the implement at its lowest position. If any part of the equipment comes closer than 4 in.
(100 mm) to the cab, adjust the 3-point hitch height
IMPORTANT: Before operating PTO driven limit control knob to limit upward movement.
equipment, check to make sure that the PTO driveline
will not over-extend so as to become disengaged, IMPORTANT: The height limit control knob must be
bottom out or be at an excessive angle. Ensure that adjusted to limit hitch height when the raise/work
the driveline shield does not contact the PTO guard or switch is activated.
81
OPERATION
REMOVING EQUIPMENT
When removing equipment, the procedure is the
reverse of attaching. The information listed below will
make disconnecting easier and safer.
• Always park the equipment on a level, firm

surface.
• Support equipment so that it will not tip or fall

when detached from the tractor.
152
• Always relieve all hydraulic pressure in remote

cylinders by selecting the float position before
disconnecting.
HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKE COUPLING

(where fitted) - Figure 152
Hydraulic trailer brakes may be connected into the
hydraulic system via a quick- release coupling (1) at
the rear of the tractor.
TOWING ATTACHMENTS AND

If the trailer brake hose is connected into the coupling
DRAWBAR
the trailer brakes will be automatically applied when
the footbrakes are used to stop the tractor. REAR TOW HITCH (where fitted) Figures - 153 to
157
Various rear tow hitches are available. All versions
consists of a fabricated steel frame bolted to the rear
WARNING: With the tractor engine off, axle centre housing.
hydraulic pressure cannot be applied to the
trailer braking system. When parking the One or two tow pins may be installed, as specified. A
tractor/trailer combination apply the tractor and trailer fixed, central tow pin (piton) may be provided at the
parking brakes while the engine is still running. With bottom of the assembly with a second tow pin,
the footbrakes locked together apply the parking adjustable for height, located above. See Figures 153
brake, stop the engine and immediately block the to 157, as appropriate, to identify the features of your
wheels. Always lock the brake pedals together when tow hitch.
a hydraulically braked trailer is attached to the tractor
A swinging drawbar may also be provided as part of
the assembly. See ‘Swinging Drawbar’ for details of
NOTE: Always keep the dust- cap in place when the drawbar operation.
trailer brake coupling is not in use. It is a legal
requirement in some countries that the trailer brakes No matter which type of tow hitch you have, the upper
may only be connected to the tractor coupling by tow pin assembly may be adjusted up or down, as
means of a compatible female coupling. required. However, the method of adjustment varies:
82
SECTION 2
Tow Hitch - Figure 153

The basic type of tow hitch is shown. The height of the
tow pin assembly (1) may be varied after removal of
the two horizontal retaining pins (4). To raise or lower
the tow pin assembly, remove the linch pins (3) from
the end of both retaining pins. Pull out the retaining
pins, move the tow pin assembly to the required
height within the frame, re-insert the retaining pins
and secure with the linch pins.
To attach a trailer drawbar to the tow pin, remove the

securing clip from the lower end of the tow pin (2) and
lift out the pin. Re-insert the tow pin so that it passes
153
through the eye of the trailer drawbar.
NOTE: The tow hitch is designed primarily for use

with four wheel trailers which do not place a heavy
downward load on the tow pin. The static downward
load on the tow pin must not exceed the rating shown
on the plate affixed to the tow hitch frame or the rear
tyre load capacity, whichever is lower. (See Rear Tyre
Pressures and Loads in Section 5).
Fixed Tow Pin (Piton) - Figure 154

An optional fixed, central tow pin (piton) may be
provided at the bottom of the assembly in some
versions.
To prevent the trailer drawbar eye from lifting off the

tow pin, an ‘L’-shaped, pivoting lock bar is installed.
To attach a trailer to the piton, extract the linch pin (4)

from the horizontal securing pin (1) and remove the
securing pin. Pivot the lock bar (2) upwards and lower
the eye of the trailer drawbar over the piton (3). Lower
the lock bar over the piton and replace the securing
pin and linch pin. The lock bar will ensure that the
trailer cannot become accidentally detached from the
piton.
NOTE: The static downward load on the lower, fixed

tow pin (piton) must not exceed the rating shown on
the plate affixed to the tow hitch frame or the rear tyre
load capacity, whichever is lower. (See Rear Tyre
Pressures and Loads in Section 5). 154
83
OPERATION
Height Adjustable Tow Pin - Figures 155 and 156

The two tow hitches shown are both equipped with a
height adjustable tow pin, adjustable as follows:
To raise or lower the tow pin assembly, grasp the

handles (1) and squeeze them together to release the
locking mechanism. Lift or lower the complete tow pin
assembly (2). When at the required height, release the
handles to lock the assembly in the nearest notch in the
carrier (3).
To attach a trailer drawbar to the upper tow pin shown

in Figure 155, remove the securing clip from the tow 155
pin (4) and lift out. Re-insert the tow pin so that it
passes through the eye of the trailer drawbar.
Replace the securing clip.
Swivelling Tow Pin - Figure 157

A swivelling, upper tow pin is available in certain
countries.
The tow pin (3) is spring-loaded in the engaged (down)

position, as shown.To attach a trailer to the tow pin, lift
the release lever (1) to the vertical position to retract the
spring-loaded tow pin up into it’s housing.
NOTE: The levers (1) and (5) are connected. A cable

may be attached to the lever (5) to permit trailer
attachment without the operator leaving the cab. 156
The pin will stay in the raised position until the trailer
drawbar is located beneath it. The eye of the drawbar
will contact a trip lever which will cause the pin to drop
down into the engaged position. Alternatively, the tow
pin will drop down into the engaged position if the
lever (2) is pushed forward.
WARNING: Do not attempt to trip the lever by

hand as the fingers may be trapped by the
action of the spring-loaded tow pin.
The tow pin may be allowed to swivel after loosening

the socket-headed screw (4) on the left-hand side of
the tow pin housing. This feature will permit a trailer
with a non-swivelling drawbar to articulate relative to
the towing tractor. 157
84
SECTION 2
NOTE: The tow hitch is designed primarily for use

with four wheel trailers which do not place a heavy
downward load on the tow pin. The static downward
load on the tow pin must not exceed the rating shown
on the plate affixed to the tow hitch frame or the rear
tyre load capacity, whichever is lower. (See Rear Tyre
Pressures and Loads in Section 5).
SWINGING DRAWBAR - Figure 158

The swinging drawbar may be fixed in any one of five
positions (three positions, if the drawbar is part of the
158
rear tow hitch assembly) or allowed to swing the full
width of the hanger.
Fasten the drawbar (1) in position using the swing

limiter pins (2) when pulling equipment which requires
accurate positioning and when transporting equipment.
Allow the drawbar to swing when pulling ground engag-

ing equipment which does not require accurate posi-
tioning. This will make steering and turning easier.
DRAWBAR HITCH PIN RETAINER - Figure159

The drawbar is equipped with a hitch pin retainer.
When the retainer is in position (1) the hitch pin is
latched in place.
159
To remove or install the hitch pin, pull the front of the

retainer up to the unlatched position (2) and remove
or install the hitch pin. Release the retainer and en-
sure it returns to the latched position when the pin is
installed.
WARNING: Always secure the drawbar to

prevent swinging when transporting equip-
ment or when operating any equipment except
ground engaging equipment.
DRAWBAR HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT - 170 h.p.

model - Figure 160
The 170 h.p. model has a straight drawbar (1). The
drawbar has no height adjustment but has three
length adjustments. 160
85
OPERATION
DRAWBAR HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT - 190 h.p.,

210 h.p. and 240 h.p. - Figure 161
The drawbar is adjustable for both height and length.
Invert the drawbar to vary the height of the hitch point
above the ground.
IMPORTANT: The clevis and hitch pin retainer must

be moved to the top when the drawbar is inverted.
DRAWBAR LENGTH - Figures 162 and 163

The front locating pin may be inserted in any of three
holes provided at the front of the drawbar to vary the 161
PTO shaft to hitch point distance.
Always use the close-coupled position (1) Figure 162

for equipment exerting high downward forces, such
as two-wheeled trailers, etc. Use the 14 in. (355 mm)
position for 540 PTO equipment, the 16 in. (406 mm)
position for 1000 PTO operation with the 21-spline
shaft and the 20 in. (508 mm) position for 1000 opera-
tion with the 20-spline shaft.
The maximum static downward loads are shown in

the following tables.
170 h.p. model
Hole Distance from Hitch Maximum Static

See Point to PTO Shaft Downward Load
Fig. 162 lb. kg 162
1 14 in. (355 mm) 5400 2449

2 16 in. (406 mm) 4600 2086
3 20 in. (508 mm) 3500 1587
190 h.p., 210 h.p. and 240 h.p. models
Hole Distance from Hitch Maximum Static

See Point to PTO Shaft Downward Load
Fig. 162 lb. kg
1 16 in. (406 mm) 6000 2750
2 20 in. (508 mm) 4700 2131
3 24 in. (609 mm) 3900 1770
To change the drawbar length, remove the two bolts

(1) Figure 163, that retain the front pin (2). Insert the
pin in the appropriate hole (see tables above) and re-
install the bolts. Torque the bolts to 45 lbf. ft. (60 Nm). 163
86
SECTION 2
WIDE SWINGING ROLLER DRAWBAR - Figure

164
When using ground engaging equipment, the wide
swinging roller drawbar offers additional turning ease
as compared to the swinging drawbar.
Secure the drawbar (1) with the swing limiter pins (2)
when using equipment which requires accurate
positioning and when transporting equipment.
Insert the swing limiter pins in alternative holes (or

remove altogether) to allow the drawbar to swing when
pulling ground engaging equipment that does not 164
require accurate positioning. This will make steering
and turning easier.
NOTE: When the tractor is equipped with the wide

swinging drawbar, the hydraulic 3-point lift linkage
must be removed.
WARNING: Always secure the drawbar to

prevent swinging when transporting
equipment or when operating any equipment except
ground engaging equipment. Always use the drawbar
or lower links in the lowered position for pull-type
work.
NOTE: When supporting equipment on the roller

drawbar, the static downward load on the drawbar
must not exceed 4050 lb. (1837 kg) or the rear tyre
load capacity, whichever is the lower. See ‘Rear Tyre
Pressures and Loads’ in the Specifications section of
this Manual.
SAFETY CHAIN - Figure 165

When towing implements (1) on public roads, use a
safety chain (2) with a tensile strength equal to or
greater than the gross weight of the implement to be
towed. This will control the implement in the event the
drawbar (3) and implement become disconnected.
An optional chain guide (4) is available to support the

chain. 165
87
OPERATION
After attaching the safety chain, make a trial run by It is recommended that you observe the following
driving the tractor to the right and to the left for a short precautions for towing equipment not equipped with
distance to check the safety chain adjustment. If brakes:
necessary, readjust to eliminate a tight or loose chain.
Check the implement operator’s manual for • Do not tow equipment weighing more than twice
implement weight and attaching hardware the tractor weight.
specifications.
Safety chains, attaching hardware and chain guide • Do not exceed 10 MPH (16 km/h) if towed
are available from your authorised dealer. equipment weighs more than the tractor.
• Do not exceed 20 MPH (32 km/h) while towing

ATTACHING AND DETACHING TRAILED equipment that weighs less than the tractor.
EQUIPMENT
IMPORTANT: Regulations in some areas require
brakes on towed equipment when operating on the
public highway. Before travelling on public roads,
make sure you comply with legal requirements. In the
U.K. you are required to comply with the Road
Vehicles (Construction and Use) Regulations - latest
edition.
To attach the tractor to trailed equipment and FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) FRONT
implements: AXLE TRACK SETTING
NOTE: The installation of dual wheels on the front
1. Ensure that the implement is at draw bar height.
axle is not recommended by New Holland. Owners
should also be aware that other wheel equipment has
2. Slowly inch rearwards to allow the drawbar and not been tested by New Holland Engineering and
implement hitch to intersect (steering sharply left and Field Test Operations.
right will aid in hitch alignment).
3. Apply the parking brake and stop the engine.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE TRACK ADJUSTMENT -
Figure 166
4. Insert the hitch pin and ensure that the retainer is
Four wheel drive (FWD) tractors have fixed axle
in the latched position.
assemblies. However, the track width is adjustable to
eight different settings by changing the wheel rim
NOTE: For implements that require hitch extensions relative to the centre disc, the rim and/or disc relative
or interfere with the tractor clevis, remove and store to the axle hub or by interchanging both front wheels.
the clevis and hitch pin.
Always use a safety chain installed between the The track settings shown in Figure 166 are obtained
tractor and implement hitch when transporting by changing the wheel rim and disc positions relative
equipment on the highway. to the hub.
88
SECTION 2
Each drawing represents either a left-hand wheel

Track Setting Disc/Rim Position
viewed from the rear or a right-hand wheel viewed
from the front.
60 in.
(1525 mm)
IMPORTANT: When the track adjustment is changed,
the steering stops must be adjusted to provide
clearance between the tractor and the tyres and,
when installed, front fenders.
64 in.
(1625 mm)
FRONT WHEEL POSITIONS - Figure 166

Use the following procedure to position the front
wheels to obtain the desired track adjustment:
68 in.
(1727 mm)
1. Position the front wheels straight ahead.
72 in.
2. Apply the park brake and place blocks at the front (1829 mm)
and rear of the rear wheels.
3. Jack up the front axle and place on jack stands.

76 in.
(1930 mm)
WARNING: With a front wheel on a four

wheel drive tractor supported on a stand,
never attempt to rotate the wheel or start the engine.
This may cause the rear wheels to move, resulting in 80 in.
the tractor falling from the stand. Wheels should (2032 mm)
always be supported such that the tyres are only just
clear of the ground.
4. Remove the front wheel. 84 in.

(2134 mm)
5. Position the wheel disc and rim as required to

achieve the desired track adjustment. (See
diagrams in Figure 166).
88 in.
(2235 mm)
6. Re-install the wheel and tighten the hardware in

a diagonal pattern to the torques shown in the
following text: 166
89
OPERATION
FRONT WHEEL POSITIONS - Figure 167

Disc to hub nuts 360 lbf. ft. (486 Nm)
Disc to rim nuts 270 lbf. ft. (364 Nm)
NOTE: Torque all wheel nuts as specified. Drive the

tractor for 200 yards (200 m) and retorque. Repeat
torque check after one hour, then at 10 hours or daily
intervals until bolt torque remains constant. Check
torque at 50-hour intervals thereafter.
NOTE: When interchanging left- and right-hand

wheel assemblies, ensure that the ‘V’ of the tyre tread
remains pointing in the direction of forward travel. 167
Check the front wheel toe-in and steering stops for

correct adjustment.
NOTE: When making a sharp turn, with SuperSteer

axle, check for possible interference between the
front tyres and the tie down brackets shown in
Figure 40 in Section 1.
FRONT WHEEL TOE-IN (Standard and

SuperSteer Axles) - Figure 168
Use the following procedure to check and adjust toe-
in:
The correct toe-in is 0 - 0.25 in. (0 - 6 mm).
1. Position the front wheels straight ahead.
2. Mark the inside front of each rim at hub height.

Mark the rim where the tyre and rim meet.
3. Measure the distance (1) between the two marks.
4. Drive the tractor forward until the tyres rotate 180°

and the marks are at hub height at the rear of the
wheels.
5. Measure the distance (2) between the two marks.
6. Subtract the front measurement from the rear

measurement to get the toe-in.
7. The toe-in should be 0 - 0.25 in. (0 - 6 mm).
8. If adjustment is required, follow the procedure for

the type of FWD axle installed (standard or
SuperSteer). 168
90
SECTION 2
Adjusting Toe-in - Standard steer FWD Axle -

Figure 169
To adjust the toe-in:
1. Loosen the locknuts (1) on each side of the tie

rod.
2. Turn the tie rod tube (2) to adjust the toe-in

to 0 - 0.25 in. (0 - 6 mm).
3. Tighten the locknuts (1) on each side of the tie rod.

169
4. Check the adjustment of the steering stops.
Adjusting Toe-in - SuperSteer FWD Axle -

Figure 170
1. Park the tractor on level ground with front axle
steering straight ahead.
NOTE: Check that the centre of the axle is aligned

with the centre of the tractor before adjusting toe-in.
Turn angle will be affected if the axle is not centred.
NOTE: Before adjusting toe-in, measure the distance

(1) between the outer (2) and inner (5) tie rod ends.
Adjust the tie rods to achieve equal measurements 170
before proceeding.
2. Loosen the locknuts (3) on each tie rod.
3. Turn each tie rod tube (4) evenly to adjust the

toe-in to 0 - 0.25 in. (0 - 6 mm).
4. Tighten the two locknuts (3) on each tie rod.
5. Check the adjustment of the steering stops.
NOTE: Inspect the inner and outer tie rod ends (5)
and (2) to ensure that they are a tight fit. If loose,
contact your New Holland dealer for assistance.
91
OPERATION
FWD STEERING STOPS - Figures 171 and 172

A steering stop is incorporated at each end of the axle.
The stops are adjustable and must be set to provide
a minimum clearance of 1.5 in. (38 mm) between the
tyres or fenders (where fitted) and any part of the
tractor with the wheels turned full left and right and the
axle fully oscillated.
NOTE: If your tractor is equipped with optional front

fenders, ensure there is adequate clearance under all
operating conditions. Adjust the steering stops, as
necessary. To obtain the 60 in. (1525 mm) track set-
ting, it will be necessary to remove the front fenders.
171
Figure 171
Each hole (1) in the steering stop is marked with a
number (2) and arrow (3). The stop has four holes.
When the arrow points to the steering knuckle, the

number indicates the turn angle. Arrows appear in
both directions on the stop so the stop can be installed
in either direction to provide eight different turn
angles.
Adjust the steering stops at both ends of the axle to

the same turn angle.
To adjust the steering stops: - Figure 172

1. Remove the clip (1) and pin (2).
2. Position the adjustable stop (3) so it will contact

the fixed axle stop (5) when there is at least 1.5in
(38 mm) clearance between the tyre and tractor
as previously described.
3. Install the pin (2) and clip (1).
4. Observe the turn angle number (4) on the stop

pin. Adjust the other stop to the same turn angle.
5. Check that both stops are adjusted to provide the

specified clearance.
WARNING: Maintain all steering

components in a reliable and satisfactory
condition to ensure safe operation and comply with
legal requirements. 172
92
SECTION 2
REAR WHEEL TRACK SETTING suitable lifting device, remove the wheel and store the
wheel and tyre where it won’t fall over. Repeating the
procedure, remove the opposite wheel and install it
INTRODUCTION
on the hub from which the first wheel was removed.
WARNING: Your tractor is produced with
lights that meet lighting regulations when
WARNING: Tractor wheels are very heavy.
operating or travelling on public roads. If the wheel
Handle with care and make sure, when
track setting is adjusted beyond the initial factory
stored, that they cannot fall and cause injury.
position, you may be required to reposition the lights
or fit auxiliary lighting to comply with legal
NOTE: When interchanging the left-and right-hand
requirements. Additionally, before travelling on public
wheels, ensure that the ‘V’ of the tyre tread remains
roads, make sure that the overall tractor width does
pointing in the direction of forward travel.
not exceed the maximum permitted in your locality.
Torque the disc to hub bolts to 680 lbf. ft. (918 Nm) in
All models are equipped with one-piece, non-adjust-
50 lbf. ft. (68 Nm) increments using a diagonal pat-
able steel wheels. The wheel discs are dished (con-
tern.
cave) and are bolted to hubs clamped to the axle
shaft. When the tractor leaves the factory, the rear
NOTE: Check bolt torque after driving the tractor for
wheels are set to a nominal 72 in. (1830 mm). This
200 yards (200 m), after 1 hour and 10 hours of
setting is achieved by clamping the wheel hubs
operation and thereafter at the 50-hour service
approximately 1 in. (25 mm) from the ends of the axle
intervals.
shaft and with the concave side of the wheel disc fac-
ing inwards (towards the tractor).
WARNING: Never operate the tractor with a
loose wheel or hub. Always tighten hardware
The track width setting may be varied as follows:
to the specified torque and at the recommended
intervals.
1. Remove the two complete wheel/hub assemblies
and change them from one side of the tractor to the
other. This will increase the track width by 6 in. (150
mm) because the concave side of the wheel disc will
face outwards. MOVING A WHEEL ON THE AXLE SHAFT -
Figures 174 and 175
Block the front wheels and jack up and support the
2. Move the complete wheel/hub assemblies on the
rear axle.
axle shafts. Each wheel can be moved outwards (to
the extreme ends of the axle shafts) to provide an
Adjustment of the track setting is achieved by sliding
increase in track width of 2 in. (50 mm) or inwards
the complete wheel/hub assembly on the axle shaft.
(towards the tractor) to decrease the track width by up
to 10 in. (250 mm).
NOTE: With the larger width tyres, it may not be pos-

sible to move the wheels further inwards due to limited
clearance between the tyre and fender.
3. A combination of methods 1 and 2 will provide a

range of track width settings from 62 in. (1575 mm) to
80 in. (2030 mm).
INTERCHANGING THE WHEELS

- Figure 173
Block the front wheels and jack up and support the
rear axle. Remove the disc to hub bolts (1). Using a 173
93
OPERATION
Figure 174
Loosen the two centre wedge bolts (1)
approximately 0.5 in. (12 mm). Remove the four
outer wedge bolts (2).
Figure 175
Clean the bolts and threaded holes in the wedges
before lubricating and installing the outer wedge bolts
at (1). These bolts are used as jack bolts to push
against the wedges. Tighten the jack bolts evenly until
the wedges loosen on the axle shaft. The wheel
assembly will now be free to slide in or out on the axle 174
shaft.
IMPORTANT: Do not use a torque greater than 300

lbf. ft. (407 Nm) on the jack bolts. The use of
penetrating oil between the wedge and axle shaft will
be of benefit. If difficulty is experienced, place a shaft
protector over the end of the axle shaft and strike with
a hammer to ‘shock’ the wedge free.
WARNING: Take suitable precautions,

including the use of safety glasses, against
the possibility of flying metal particles.
Set the wheel to the desired position on the shaft.

Remove the jack bolts and replace them in the outer 175
holes (2) Figure 174.
Tighten all six wedge retaining bolts in increments of

50 lbf. ft. (68 Nm) until a final torque of 290 lbf. ft. (391
Nm) is achieved.
IMPORTANT: The wedge bolts must be tightened

evenly.
Repeat the procedure on the other wheel, making

sure that both rear wheels are the same distance from
the ends of the axle shafts.
NOTE: Check the torque of all six wedge retaining

bolts on each wheel after driving the tractor for 200
yards (200 m), after 1 hour and 10 hours operation
and thereafter at the 50-hour service intervals.
94
SECTION 2
BALLASTING AND TYRES • Maintaining equal tyre pressure in both tyres on

a given axle
BALLASTING
Maximum tractor performance is dependent upon
proper ballasting and tyre selection. Maximum effi- SELECTING BALLAST
ciency will be achieved when tractor weight is correct When tractor horsepower loads vary, the optimum
for the application. weight of the tractor will change. This means that bal-
last may have to be added or removed to maintain the
Selecting the proper size and type of front and rear best tractor performance. Proper ballast will greatly
tyres is also important in achieving maximum tractor improve tractor operation and ride.
efficiency. Various sizes and types of tyres are avail-
able for your tractor. Your authorised dealer can as- Always treat both tyres on a tractor axle equally when
sist you with this subject. selecting ballast and tyre pressure.
The tyres selected for your tractor must be able to

The amount of ballast required is affected by:
support the weight of the tractor and equipment. The
tyres must also be able to provide adequate traction
to utilize the tractor horsepower and turn it into useful • Shipping weight of tractor
drawbar horsepower.
• Soil and traction conditions
Your tractor has radial tyres. You will find that they pro-
duce superior performance over similar size cross ply
• Type of implement: fully-mounted, semi-mounted
tyres. You will have to adjust the ballast, tyre pressure
or trailed
and tractor weight, split between the front and rear
axles for various loads and conditions to achieve the
best ride and performance. • Working speed
Always maintain the correct air pressure in the tyre to

• Tractor horsepower load
carry the load. Do not over inflate radial tyres. Radial
tyres will work with lower air pressures and will show
up to 20% sidewall deflection or bulge when correctly • Type and size of tyres
inflated.
• Tyre pressures
The force that enables the tyres to drive the tractor
must be transmitted through the tyre sidewalls. Tyres
work best when both the tyres on a given axle are
working at the same rate. ADAPTING BALLAST TO WORK LOAD AND
GROUND SPEED
Do not use more ballast than needed. Excess ballast
FACTORS AFFECTING TYRE PERFORMANCE should be removed when it is not required.
• Correct air pressure for the load
Do not add excessive weight to the tractor to pull
heavy loads. Reduce the load because pulling a light-
• Correct sidewall deflection
er load at a higher ground speed is more efficient and
easier on the tractor.
• 8-12% wheel slip
NOTE: Heavy draft loads should not be continually

• Correct tyre size for expected load pulled in a gear that results in the engine labouring at
ground speeds below 5 MPH (8 km/h). Reduce the
• No more than 75% fill of liquid ballast load as required to achieve required ground speeds.
95
OPERATION
Too Little Ballast

• Rough ride
• Excessive wheel slip
• Power loss
• Tyre wear
• Excess fuel consumption
• Lower productivity
Too Much Ballast 176

• Higher maintenance costs
• Increased driveline wear
• Power loss
• Increased soil compaction BALLASTING FOR TRANSPORT

CAUTION: Additional front ballast may be
• Reduced fuel economy needed when transporting large 3-point
mounted equipment. Always drive slowly over rough
• Reduced productivity terrain, no matter how much front ballast is used.
Add front end ballast when it is needed for stability

BALLAST LIMITATIONS and steering control. Never allow the tractor to
Ballast should be limited by the tyre capacity or tractor operate with the front wheels off the ground. Tractor
capacity. Each tyre has a recommended carrying front end ballast may not always maintain satisfactory
capacity which should not be exceeded. stability if the tractor is operated at high speed on
rough or hilly terrain. Reduce speed and exercise
If a greater amount of weight is needed for traction, caution under these conditions.
larger tyres should be used.
Ballast can be added by bolting on cast iron weights BALLASTING FWD TRACTORS - Figure 176
or by adding liquid calcium chloride in the tyres. Ideal tyre slippage for FWD tractors is 8 - 12%. To
Bolt-on cast iron weights are recommended because reduce tyre slippage to this level, more weight is
they can easily be removed when not needed. needed on the front than with two-wheel drive
tractors. The best weight split is 40% front, 60% rear,
IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the tractor gross vehicle of total tractor weight. Front ballast may be needed to
weight shown below. This can cause an overload obtain this weight split.
condition that may invalidate the warranty and may
exceed the load rating of the tyres. Use adequate front weight as required for the
operating condition. Four-wheel drive tractors should
IMPORTANT: The maximum recommended gross have adequate ballast to properly load the front
vehicle weight is: wheels. This is especially important when pulling
heavy loads. Remove ballast when it is no longer
170 h.p. 21,750 lb. (9875 kg) needed.
190 h.p. 31,500 lb. (14300 kg)
210 h.p. 31,500 lb. (14300 kg) The tyre inflation chart in Section 5 shows the load
240 h.p. 31,500 lb. (14300 kg) carrying capacity for the front tyres.
96
SECTION 2
CAST IRON FRONT WEIGHTS

Two different types of front weight are available as fol-
lows:
Figure 177
Up to twenty two 88 lb. (40 kg) weights may be
installed which, together with the mounting bracket,
will provide a total weight of 2200 lb. (1000 kg).
177
Figure 178
Up to sixteen 242 lb. (110 kg) weights may be installed
which, together with the mounting bracket, will pro-
vide a total weight of 4072 lb. (1850 kg).
INSTALLING FRONT WEIGHTS - Figure 179

CAUTION: The front weights are heavy. Use
appropriate lifting equipment or have the job
done by your authorised dealer.
To add or remove individual weights, remove the four

tie bolts (1) and loosen the clamp bolts (2). Add or
remove individual weights as required, then re-install
178
the bolts. Torque the clamp bolts (2) to 60 lbf. ft. (81
Nm) and the tie bolts (1) to 140 lbf. ft. (189 Nm).
The complete weight assembly can be removed after

both clamp bolts (2) are removed. Use a suitable lift-
ing device to remove the weights.
When the weight assembly is re-installed, be sure the

centre weights are seated on the weight bracket
alignment tab. Install the clamp bolts (2) and torque to
60 lbf. ft. (81 Nm).
WARNING: The tractor must not be operated

unless both the tie bolts and the clamp bolts
are in position with the bolts tightened as specified.
Recheck the bolt torques after one, eight and 50
hours of operation if the bolts have been disturbed for
any reason. 179
97
OPERATION
TYRES AND BALLASTING Filling a Tyre with Liquid Ballast

The tyre charts in Section 5 shows the load carrying CAUTION: Installing liquid ballast requires
capacity per tyre. special equipment and training. Have liquid
ballast added by your authorised dealer or an
IMPORTANT: Do not overload tyres. If the maximum agricultural tyre specialist.
tractor weight exceeds the load rating of the tyre as
listed in the tyre chart, reduce load, install higher rated
• Move the tractor so that the tyre valve is at the
tyres, or reduce road speed.
highest point.
NOTE: Include the weight of fully raised three-point
hitch implements when calculating rear axle load when • Jack up the wheel.
operating at road speeds for an extended period.
• Remove the valve core and connect the pump.
IMPORTANT: To extend tractor life and avoid excessive
soil compaction and rolling resistance, do not over bal-
last. Ballast should never exceed the weight needed to • Hydro-inflate the tyre.
provide traction for sustained full power loads.
NOTE: If the tyre is filled with liquid ballast up to the
valve level, the tyre will be approximately 75% full.
LIQUID BALLAST FOR TYRES
IMPORTANT: The practice of liquid ballasting tyres is
forbidden in some countries. Install cast iron weights • Adjust the final working pressure with the tractor
as a first choice. Use liquid ballast only if necessary weight on the tyre and the wheel turned so that the
and where legally permissible. valve is at the lowest point. Use an air- water
gauge.
A solution of water and calcium chloride (CaCl2) pro-
vides safe, economical ballast. Used properly, it will Radial-ply tyres are installed on your tractor. The fol-
not damage tyres, tubes or rims and will provide lowing charts show the maximum ballast each size
protection from freezing down to an ambient tempera- and type of tyre will hold.
ture of - 50°C (- 58°F).
Front Tyre Water quantity CaCl2 Total Weight
NOTE: Use of alcohol as liquid ballast is not recom-
Size Imp. gal. litres lb. kg. lb. kg.
mended. Calcium chloride solution is heavier and
more economical.
16.9- R28 45 205 271 123 723 328
16.9- R30 47 213 282 128 752 341
Where freezing temperatures are never encoun-
480/70R- 28 49 224 295 134 789 358
tered, plain water may be used. However, it will be
480/70R- 30 51 233 309 140 822 373
some 20% lighter than an equivalent amount of cal-
540/65R- 28 56 253 335 152 893 405
cium chloride solution.
540/65R- 30 58 263 348 158 928 421
600/65R- 28 67 305 403 183 1076 488
Mixing the Ballast
WARNING: If you are mixing liquid ballast
yourself, take precautions and wear suitable Rear Tyre Water quantity CaCl2 Total Weight
protective clothing, including the use of eye Size Imp. gal. litres lb. kg. lb. kg.
protection.
20.8- 38 91 413 547 248 1457 661
It is imperative that the calcium chloride flakes are 20.8- 42 98 444 586 266 1565 710
added to the water and the solution stirred until dis- 580/70R- 38 96 437 578 262 1541 699
solved. Never add water to calcium chloride. If cal- 580/70R- 42 104 471 624 283 1662 754
cium chloride should contact the eyes, wash the eyes 650/65R- 38 104 475 628 285 1675 760
immediately with clean, cold water for at least 5 min- 650/65R- 42 113 514 679 308 1812 822
utes. Consult a doctor as soon as possible. 710/70R- 38 137 621 820 372 2189 993
98
SECTION 2
IMPORTANT: The weights in the charts are based on • Never attempt tyre repairs on a public road.
a 75% fill and should be regarded as a maximum.
Never fill a radial tyre to more than 75% capacity. • Ensure the jack is placed on a firm, level surface.
More liquid ballast solution will leave too little air
space to absorb shocks. Damage to the tyre could oc- • Ensure the jack has adequate lift capacity for the
cur due to the lower inflation pressures that are used tractor.
with radial tyres.
• Use jack stands or other suitable blocking to
NOTE: Some sloshing of the liquid ballast in the tyres
support the tractor while repairing tyres.
may be noticed when the tractor is first stopped. This
is normal.
• Do not put any part of your body under the tractor
or start the engine while the tractor is on the jack.
Emptying a Tyre of Ballast
• Move the tractor so that the tyre valve is at the • Never hit a tyre or rim with a hammer.
lowest point.
• Ensure the rim is clean and free of rust or
• Jack up the wheel. damage. Do not weld, braze, otherwise repair or
use a damaged rim.
• Remove the valve core and connect the pump.
• Do not inflate a tyre unless the rim is mounted on
• Completely evacuate the tyre. the tractor or is secured so that it will not move if
the tyre or rim should suddenly fail.
• Re-inflate the tyre.
• When fitting a new or repaired tyre, use a clip-on
• Adjust the final working pressure with the tractor valve adaptor with a remote gauge that allows the
weight on the tyre and the wheel turned so that the operator to stand clear of the tyre while inflating it.
valve is at the lowest point. Use an air- water gauge. Use a safety cage, if available.
• Never inflate a traction tyre over 35 lbf. in 2 (2.4

TYRE CARE
bar). If the bead does not seat on the rim by the
Check the air pressure in the tyres and recheck every time this pressure is reached, deflate the tyre,
50 hours or weekly. relubricate the bead with a soap/water solution
and re-inflate. Do not use oil or grease. Inflation
When checking tyre pressures, inspect for damaged beyond 35 lbf. in 2 with unseated beads may break
tread and side walls. the bead or rim with explosive force sufficient to
cause a serious injury.
Inflation pressure affects the amount of weight that a
tyre may carry. Locate the tyre size for your tractor in
• After seating the beads, adjust inflation pressure
the Tyre Pressure and Load tables in Section 5 of this
to the recommended operating pressure.
manual. Do not exceed the load for the pressures
listed. Do not over- or under-inflate the tyres.
• Do not re-inflate a tyre that has been run flat or
WARNING: Inflating or servicing tyres can seriously underinflated until it has been inspected
be dangerous. Whenever possible, trained for damage by a qualified person.
personnel should be called in to service or install
tyres. In any event, to avoid the possibility of serious • Torque wheel nuts after driving the tractor for 200
or fatal injury, take the following precautions: yards (200 m), after 1 hour and 10 hours operation,
and thereafter at the 50-hour service intervals.
• Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care
and ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple • Refer to tractor weighting section before adding
and cause injury. ballast to the tyres.
99
OPERATION
NOTES
100
SECTION 3
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION FLEXIBLE MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
This section gives full details of the service proce- The intervals listed in the lubrication and mainte-
dures necessary to maintain your tractor at peak effi- nance chart are guidelines to be used when operating
ciency. The lubrication and maintenance chart on in normal working conditions.
page 7 provides a ready reference to these require-
ments. Each operation is numbered for easy refer- Adjust the intervals for environmental and working
ence. conditions. Intervals should be shortened under ad-
verse (wet, muddy, sandy, extremely dusty) working
In addition to the regular maintenance operations conditions.
listed, check the following items every 10 hours or dai-
ly during the first 50 hours of operation:
• Wheel nuts for tightness LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART -

PAGE 7
• Front axle hub oil levels The chart lists the intervals when routine checks, lu-
brication, service and/or adjustments should be per-
IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground and, formed. Use the chart as a quick reference guide
where applicable, extend all cylinders before check- when servicing the tractor. The operations follow the
ing oil levels. chart.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FIRST 50-HOUR SERVICE

Read and observe all safety precautions listed in At the first 50-hour service, ensure that the following
‘Servicing the Tractor’ in the Introduction section at additional service operations are carried out. The
the front of this Manual. items are listed in the ‘First 50-Hour Service’ checklist
at the rear of this manual.
NOTE: Dispose of used filters and fluids properly.
• Change engine oil and filter
CAUTION: Do not check, lubricate, service
or make adjustments to the tractor with the
• Change fuel filter/water separator
engine running.
• Clean fuel sedimenter
PREVENTING SYSTEM CONTAMINATION • Change hydraulic oil filter

To prevent contamination when changing oils, filters,
etc., always clean the area around filler caps, level • Change transmission oil filter
plugs, drain plugs, dipsticks and filters prior to remov-
al. Before connecting remote cylinders, ensure that • Change FWD differential oil
oil contained within them is clean, has not degener-
ated due to long storage and is of the correct grade. • Change FWD axle hub oil
To prevent dirt entry during greasing, wipe dirt from • Check and adjust park brake
the grease fittings before greasing. Wipe excess
grease from the fitting after greasing. • Check all air intake connections
1
• Tighten all cooling system hose connections. FUEL REQUIREMENTS

The quality of fuel used is an important factor for de-
• Check torque of front end weight clamp bolts pendable performance and satisfactory engine life.
(when installed) Fuels must be clean, well-refined, and non-corrosive
to fuel system parts. Be sure to use fuel of a known
• Check torque of safety cab mount bolts
quality from a reputable supplier.
• Check torque of exhaust manifold bolts
Use Number 2-D in temperatures above - 7° C (20° F).
• Perform Powershift transmission clutch
calibration
Use Number 1-D in temperatures below - 7° C (20° F).
NOTE: Items listed in the first 50-hour check are im-
portant. If not performed, early component failure and
To obtain optimum combustion and minimum engine
reduced tractor life may result.
wear, the fuel selected for use should conform to the
application and property requirements outlined in the
following ‘Diesel Fuel Selection Chart’.
FUELLING THE TRACTOR

DIESEL FUEL SELECTION CHART
CAUTION: When handling diesel fuel, ob-
serve the following:
General Final Cetane Sulphur
Do not smoke around diesel fuel. Under no circum- Fuel Boiling Rating Content
stances should gasoline, alcohol, gasohol or diesel- Classification Point (max) (min) (max)
hol (a mixture of diesel fuel and alcohol) be added to
diesel fuel because of increased fire or explosion No. 1-D 288° C (550° F) 40* 0.3%
risks. In a closed container such as a fuel tank they
are more explosive than pure gasoline. Do not use No. 2-D 357° C (675° F) 40 0.5%
these blends. Additionally, dieselhol is not approved
due to possible inadequate lubrication of the fuel in-
jection system.
NOTE: When long periods of idling or cold weather
Clean the filler cap area and keep it free of debris. conditions below 0°C (32°F) are encountered or
when continuously operating at an altitude above
5,000 ft. (1500 m) use Number 1-D fuel.
Fill the tank at the end of each day to reduce overnight
condensation.
*When continually operating at low temperatures or
high altitude, a minimum cetane rating of 45 is
Never take the cap off or refuel with the engine run-
required.
ning.
Keep control of the fuel nozzle while filling the fuel Using diesel fuel with sulphur content above 0.5%
tank. requires more frequent oil changes as noted in the
maintenance schedule.
Don’t fill the tank to capacity. Allow room for expan-

sion. If the original fuel tank cap is lost, replace it The use of diesel fuel with a sulphur content above
with a genuine original equipment cap and tighten 1.3% is not recommended.
securely.
For the best fuel economy, use Number 2-D fuel
Wipe up spilled fuel immediately. whenever temperatures allow.
2
SECTION 3
Do not use Number 2-D fuel at temperatures below • Install bulk storage tanks away from direct
- 7° C (20° F). The cold temperatures will cause the sunlight and angle them slightly so sediment in
fuel to thicken, which may prevent the engine from the tanks will settle away from the outlet pipe.
running. (If this happens, contact your dealer.)
To be sure that a fuel meets the required properties,

• To facilitate moisture and sediment removal,
enlist the aid of a reputable fuel oil supplier. The re-
provide a drain plug at the lowest point at the end
sponsibility for clean fuel lies with the fuel supplier as
opposite the outlet pipe.
well as the fuel user.
FUEL STORAGE
• If fuel is not filtered from the storage tank, put a
Take the following precautions to ensure that stored
funnel with a fine mesh screen in the fuel tank filler
fuel is kept free of dirt, water and other contaminants.
neck when refuelling.
• Store fuel in black iron tanks, not galvanized

tanks, as the zinc coating will react with the fuel
and form compounds that will contaminate the • Arrange fuel purchases so summer grade fuels
injection pump and injectors. are not held over and used in winter.
FILLING THE FUEL TANK - Figure 1

1. Clean the area around the fuel cap (1) to prevent
debris from entering the fuel tank (2).
2. Remove the cap and place in a clean area during

refuelling.
3. After filling the tank, replace and tighten the fuel

cap.
NOTE: Fuel tank capacity is 91.6 Imp. gallons (416

litres).
IMPORTANT: Replace a lost or damaged cap with a

genuine, original equipment replacement cap. 1
3
REMOVING GUARDS TO GAIN

ACCESS TO COMPONENTS FOR
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
INTRODUCTION
To gain access to perform inspection, lubrication and
maintenance operations, guards, access doors and
panels may need to be opened, closed, removed and
re-installed. The following pages cover these proce-
dures.
IMPORTANT: After performing work on the tractor,

install all guards before operating the tractor. 2
IMPORTANT: Follow the guidelines listed under the

heading ‘Servicing the Tractor’ in the ‘Safety Precau-
tions’ section of this book.
OPENING THE ENGINE ACCESS DOORS -

Figure 2
An access door with a hand grip slot (1) is located on
each side of the tractor to provide access for all daily
engine fluid level checks and to perform other mainte-
nance.
Pull outward on the hand grip (1) to open the door.
Located behind the left-hand access door are the:
S Hood release lever 3
S Coolant recovery tank
S Engine oil dipstick

REMOVING THE ACCESS DOORS - Figure 3
S Engine oil fill cap The doors may be removed to provide improved
access.
S Engine oil filter
To remove:
Located behind the right-hand access door are the: S Open the hood.
S Fuel filter/water separator

S Open the access door (1) approximately 1 in. (25
mm).
S Starter
S Lift the door up and slide the hinge pins from the
S Booster battery connection points mounting brackets.
4
SECTION 3
HOOD - Figure 4
The hood is hinged at the rear to provide easy access
to the engine area. Two gas struts (located under the
hood) assist in raising the hood to either of two
positions.
The first position provides access for routine mainte-

nance except servicing the air cleaner.
The second position provides access to service the

air cleaner.
4
NOTE: The gas struts can be repositioned to adjust

the amount of force needed to open or close the hood.
Gas strut adjustment is covered in Operation 56 in
this section of the manual.
OPENING THE HOOD - Figure 5
To Open the Hood to Position 1:

1. Open the left-hand access door
2. Push forward and up on the hood latch release

lever (1) to unlock the hood.
5
3. Lift up on the handle (2) until the gas struts raise
the hood to the first position.
OPENING THE HOOD - Figure 6
To open the hood to position 2:

1. Pull down on the handle (1) to unlock the slide
latch (2).
2. Push up on the slide latch.
3. Release the handle (1). The gas struts will raise

the hood to the second position. 6
5
CLOSING THE HOOD - Figure 7
To Close the Hood from Position 1:

Pull down on the handle (1) until the hood is in the
closed position.
CLOSING THE HOOD - Figure 8
To Close the Hood from Position 2:

1. Push up on the slide latch (1). The hood may need
to be raised slightly to release the latch.
2. Pull down on the handle (2) until the hood is in the

closed position.
3. Pull up on handle (2) to be sure the hood is

8
properly latched.
REMOVING THE BATTERY COVER - Figure 9
To Remove the Cover:

1. Remove the three attaching bolts (1).
2. Disconnect the work light electrical connector (2).
3. Remove the cover (3) by pulling forward. 9
6
SECTION 3
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART

Service Operation Check Lube Adjust Wash Page
Interval No. Maintenance Requirement Clean Change Drain No.
When
warning 1 Engine air cleaner outer element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 8
lamp lights
Every 2 Engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x ............... x 11

10 hours 3 Engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x ...............x 11
or 4 Radiator, oil cooler, condenser and air/air intercooler . x ..x 12
daily 5 Transmission/rear axle/hydraulic oil level . . . . . . . . . . . x ............... x 13
6 Fuel filter/water separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 13

7 Fuel sedimenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x . . x 14
Every 8 Cab air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 14
50 9 Front and rear wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 15
hours 10 Tyre pressures and condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 15
*11/15 FWD standard steer axle grease fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 15/7
*16/22 FWD supersteer axle grease fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 17/19
*23 Three point hitch linkage grease fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 19
*24 Wide swinging drawbar grease fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 20
#25 Engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 20

26 Fuel sedimenter screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 22
27 FWD axle differential oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 22
Every 28 FWD axle hub oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 23
300 29 A/C receiver drier sight glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 23
hours 30 Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 24
31 Battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 25
32 Shift quality - Powershift transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 25
33 Cab air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 26
34 Cab recirculation filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 27
35 Safety cab mounting bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 28
36 Engine air cleaner outer filter element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 29

Every 37 Engine air inlet connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 29
600 38 Fuel filter/water separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 31
hours 39 Rocker cover ventilation filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 32
40 Air conditioner drain tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 32
Every 41 Transmission/rear axle/hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 33

900 hours +42 Hydraulic pump inlet screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 34
or +43 Transmission oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 35
annually +44 Hydraulic oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 35
45 Engine air cleaner inner and outer filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 36
46 Engine valve clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 37
Every 1200 47 FWD axle differential oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 37
hours or 48 FWD axle hub oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 38
annually 49 Cab air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 38
50 Coolant filter/conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 39
51 Clutch calibration - Powershift transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 40
Every 2400 52 Fuel injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x . . x . . . . . . . . . . . x 43
hours or 53 Engine coolant and filter/conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 44
two years
54 Parking brake adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 47

55 Windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 47
56 Hood gas struts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 48
57 Bleeding the fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
General 58 Fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
main- 59 Headlight bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
tenance 60 Worklight bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
61 Turn signal/stop lights/parking light bulb replacement - fender mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
62 Turn signal bulb replacement - roof mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
63 Electronic instrument cluster (EIC) bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
64 Storage preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
65 Prepare the tractor for use after storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
* Grease at 10-hour interval when operating in very wet, muddy or extremely dusty conditions.
# Oil change interval will be reduced if fuel has a high sulphur content or if the tractor is operated in extremely cold temperatures.
+ Perform these operations with the oil drained within operation 41.
7
WHEN THE WARNING LAMP GLOWS
OPERATION 1
SERVICE ENGINE AIR CLEANER - Figures 10

to 17
Clean the outer element when the restriction indicator
light on the instrument console illuminates. Perform
service within one hour of operation after the indicator
lights.
IMPORTANT: Clean the outer element only when the

restriction light illuminates. Cleaning the filter too fre- 10
quently will decrease the service life of the filter.
To service the filter:
1. Unscrew the wing nut (1) and remove the outer

cover (2). The wing nut is attached to the cover.
See Figure 10.

filter element (2). See Figure 11.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove or disturb the inner ele-

ment (3).
3. Examine the inside of the outer element. If dust is

present, the outer element is defective and must
be replaced.
11
4. Clean the outer element using either method A, B,

or C, depending on the element’s condition
Methods A or B should be used for dry dust.
Method C should be used if the element is sooty, oily

or heavily contaminated, or after cleaning the element
six times using methods A or B.
Method A
Lightly tap the ends of the element against the palm
of the hand. See Figure 12.
IMPORTANT: Do not tap the element against a hard

surface as this damages the element. 12
8
SECTION 3
Method B
Use compressed air, not exceeding 30 lbf/in2 (2 bar).
Insert the air line nozzle inside the element. Hold the
nozzle 6 in. (150 mm) from the element and blow the
dust from the inside through the element to the
outside. See Figure 13.
WARNING: Wear eye protection and a face

mask when carrying out this operation.
13
Method C
Immerse the element in warm water containing a
small amount of non-sudsing detergent. Allow to soak
for at least 15 minutes. Keep the open end of the
element above the water line. See Figure 14.
IMPORTANT: Never use fuel oil, gasoline, solvent or

water hotter than the hand can stand, otherwise the
filter element may be damaged.
After soaking, agitate the element in the water, taking 14

care not to allow dirty water outside the element to
splash over to the inside.
Rinse the element with clean, running water. Rinse

from the inside of the element through to the outside
until the water is free of dirt. If a hose is used, do not
exceed 30 lbf/in2 (2 bar). A gentle trickle of water is
sufficient and will ensure that the element is not
ruptured. See Figure 15.
Shake out excess water from the element and allow

to air dry. Do not use compressed air, a light bulb or
heat to dry the element. 15
9
NOTE: It usually takes one to three days for a filter

element to dry.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to dry the element with

heat or compressed air and do not install until thor-
oughly dry as it may rupture. It is recommended that
a new or previously cleaned element be installed at
this service and the washed element put aside for
installation at the next service. The spare element
should be stored in a dry place and wrapped to pre-
vent dust contamination or damage.
16
NOTE: An outer filter element may be washed up to
six times.
5. Examine the element for damage by placing a

light inside the element. See Figure 16. Discard
the element if pin pricks of light can be seen or if
there are areas where the paper appears thin.
6. Check the element material for bunching; the

metal casing for distortion and the rubber gasket
for damage. Discard the filter element if it is
damaged.
7. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using a

damp, lint-free cloth on a probe. Do not damage
the inner filter element.
8. Install a cleaned or a new outer element. Tighten

the wing nut.
NOTE: Replace the wing nut seal if it is damaged.
9. Install the air cleaner cover (2) and wing nut (1).
See Figure 17.
If the restriction indicator light continues to illuminate

after cleaning the element, replace the element. 17
10
SECTION 3
EVERY 10 HOURS OF OPERATION

OR DAILY (whichever occurs first)
OPERATION 2
CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL - Figure 18

Check the oil level when the tractor is parked on a lev-
el surface and after the engine has been stopped for
a minimum of five minutes.
1. Remove the dipstick (1) wipe clean and re-insert

fully.
18
2. Pull the dipstick out and check the oil level. The oil
level should be in the cross-hatched area (2).
3. Remove the filler cap (3) and add fresh oil as

required until the oil level falls in the cross-
hatched area of the dipstick.
NOTE: Do not operate the engine with the oil level be-
low the bottom mark on the dipstick.
NOTE: Do not fill above the cross-hatched area. The

excessive oil will burn off and give a false impression
of oil consumption.
See inside rear cover for the correct oil specification

and viscosity.
19
OPERATION 3 WARNING: The cooling system operates

under pressure which is controlled by the
CHECK ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL - Figure 19 radiator pressure cap. It is dangerous to remove the
Check the coolant level in the recovery tank (1) when cap while the system is hot. When the system has
the engine is cold. The coolant level should be to the cooled, use a thick cloth and turn the radiator cap
bottom line (2) on the recovery tank. If coolant is slowly to the first stop and allow the pressure to
required, remove the filler cap (3) and add a 50/50 water escape before fully removing the cap. Coolant should
and antifreeze mixture as specified inside the rear be kept off the skin. Adhere to the precautions
cover. outlined on the coolant filter and antifreeze container.
Remove the radiator pressure cap when the system

IMPORTANT: Install a new filter/conditioner in the
is cold. Add coolant as required to bring the level to
event of a large loss of coolant such as a failed cool-
the bottom of the filler neck. Install the radiator pres-
ant hose. See Operation 50.
sure cap and add coolant to the recovery tank.
NOTE: If no coolant is visible in the recovery tank, the NOTE: If the coolant level is low, check the system for
coolant level must be checked in the radiator. leaks and repair as required.
11
OPERATION 4
CHECK RADIATOR, OIL COOLER/AIR

CONDITIONER CONDENSER CORES (170 and
190 h.p. Models) - Figure 20
Check the cores for chaff accumulation or blockage.
If any is noted, clean as follows:
1. Use compressed air or a pressure washer not

exceeding 100 lbf/in2 (7 bar) for cleaning.
2. Direct the air or water through each core from the

back to the front. Clean the radiator (1) first, then
20
the air conditioner condenser (2) and, finally, the
oil cooler (3).
NOTE: If the cores are blocked with any oily sub-

stances, apply a detergent solution and remove it with
a pressure washer.
3. Straighten any bent fins.
CAUTION: Wear eye protection and pro-

tective clothing during the cleaning pro-
cess. Clear the area of bystanders so they are not
OPERATION 4
struck by flying particles.
CHECK RADIATOR, OIL COOLER/AIR

CONDITIONER CONDENSER AND
INTERCOOLER CORES (210 and 240 h.p.
Models) - Figure 21
Check the cores for chaff accumulation or blockage.
If any is noted, clean as follows:
1. Release the latches (1) on the air conditioner

condenser (2) and swing it open.
2. Use compressed air or a pressure washer for

cleaning. Do not exceed 100 lbf/in2 (7 bar).
3. Direct the air or water through each core from the

back to the front. Clean the radiator (3) first, the
intercooler (4) second, the oil cooler (5) third and,
finally, the air conditioner condenser (2).
NOTE: If the cores are blocked with any oily sub-

stances, apply a detergent solution and remove it with
a pressure washer.
4. Straighten any bent fins. 21
12
SECTION 3
OPERATION 5
CHECK TRANSMISSION/REAR AXLE/-

HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL - Figure 22
Check the oil level with the tractor parked on a level
surface, with all cylinders extended and the engine
shut off for at least five minutes.
1. Remove the dipstick (1).
2. Check that the oil level is between the full (2) and
add marks (3) on the dipstick.
3. Remove the filler cap (4) and add oil as required if 22

oil level is low.
See inside rear cover for the correct oil specification.
EVERY 50 HOURS
Complete the preceding operations plus the
following:
OPERATION 6
CHECK FUEL SYSTEM WATER SEPARATOR -

Figure 23
IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnecting any
part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly clean the
area to be worked on.
If there is water or sediment present in the filter/sepa-

rator (4), drain the separator bowl (1) as follows:
1. Open the drain plug (2).
2. Operate the hand primer (3) until all water is

drained. Catch the fuel in a suitable container and
dispose of properly.
3. Close the drain plug (2).
4. Press the hand primer (3) repeatedly until

resistance is felt, indicating that the
filter/separator is full of fuel. 23
13
OPERATION 7
CHECK THE FUEL SEDIMENTER - Figure 24

Check the sedimenter bowl (1) and filter screen (2) for
contaminants. If contamination can be seen, clean
the sedimenter bowl and screen as described in Op-
eration 26.
NOTE: A partially plugged filter screen can cause re-

duced fuel supply to the engine which can cause a re-
duction in engine performance.
24
OPERATION 8
CLEAN THE CAB AIR FILTER - Figure 25

Before servicing the filter, switch off the blower and
close all windows and one door. Forcibly close the
other door. The resulting back pressure will dislodge
most of the loose dirt from the underside of the filter.
NOTE: In humid conditions, such as occur on most

early mornings, do not switch on the blower prior to
servicing the filter. Damp particles drawn into the filter
may be difficult to remove without washing.
NOTE: The filter is made of specially treated paper

with a rubber sealing strip bonded to the upper sur-
face. Do not damage the element during removal.
To clean the filter:

25
1. Loosen the filter cover retaining screw (1).
2. Lower the front of the filter cover (2).
NOTE: The filter cover is hinged at the rear.

6. Install the filter with the rubber seal (4) facing the
3. Remove the filter element (3). cab roof.
7. Close the front of the cover and tighten the

4. Clean the filter using compressed air not
retaining screw.
exceeding 30 lbf/in2 (2 bar). Hold the nozzle at
least 12 in. (300 mm) from the filter to prevent NOTE: The filter should be cleaned more frequently
damage to the paper pleats. Direct the when operating in extremely dusty conditions.
compressed air through the filter opposite the
normal air flow (from the clean side through to the WARNING: The cab air filter is designed to
dirty side). remove dust from the air but will not exclude
chemical vapour. Follow the chemical manufacturers
5. Clean the filter chamber with a damp, lint-free directions regarding protection from dangerous
cloth. chemicals.
14
SECTION 3
OPERATION 9
CHECK FRONT AND REAR WHEEL NUTS

Check the front and rear wheel hardware for tightness
using a torque wrench or torque multiplier. The speci-
fied torque figures are shown in the following table:
Front disc to hub nuts 250 lbf. ft. (339 Nm)
Front disc to rim nuts 270 lbf. ft. (364 Nm)
Rear wedge to hub bolts 290 lbf. ft. (391 Nm)
Rear disc to hub bolts 680 lbf. ft. (918 Nm)
OPERATION 10
CHECK TYRE PRESSURES AND TYRE

CONDITION
Check and adjust the front and rear tyre pressures.
Inspect the tread and sidewalls for damage.
Adjust the tyre pressures to suit the load being car-

ried. See ‘Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads’ in
Section 5.
NOTE: If the tyres are ballasted with a calcium chlo-

ride/water solution, use a special tyre gauge as the
solution will corrode a standard-type gauge. Check
pressure with the valve stem at the bottom.
OPERATIONS 11 to 15
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) STANDARD STEER

FRONT AXLE GREASE FITTINGS
Operations 11 through 15 cover FWD standard steer
front axle lubrication.
26
Lubricate by supplying grease through the fittings.
NOTE: Lubricate at 10-hour intervals when operating OPERATION 11

in extremely wet, muddy or very dusty conditions. LUBRICATE FWD STANDARD STEER AXLE
PIVOT PIN - Figure 26
See inside rear cover for the correct grease IMPORTANT: Lubricate until grease appears at each
specification. end of pivot pin.
15
OPERATION 12
LUBRICATE FWD STANDARD STEER AXLE

KINGPIN BEARINGS (two fittings on each axle
end) - Figure 27
27
OPERATION 13
LUBRICATE FWD STANDARD STEER AXLE TIE

ROD ENDS (one fitting each end) - Figure 28
28
OPERATION 14
LUBRICATE FWD STANDARD STEER AXLE

CYLINDERS (two fittings on each cylinder) -
Figure 29
29
16
SECTION 3
OPERATION 15
LUBRICATE FWD STANDARD STEER DRIVE

SHAFT SPLINES - Figure 30
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) SUPERSTEER

FRONT AXLE GREASE FITTINGS
Operations 16 through 22 cover FWD SuperSteer
front axle lubrication.
NOTE: Lubricate at 10-hour intervals when operating 30

in extremely wet, muddy or very dusty conditions.
See inside rear cover for the correct grease

specification.
OPERATION 16
LUBRICATE FWD SUPERSTEER AXLE FRONT

PIVOT PINS - Figure 31
IMPORTANT: Lubricate until grease appears at both
ends of the pivot pin.
31
OPERATION 17
LUBRICATE FWD SUPERSTEER AXLE REAR

PIVOT PIN - Figure 32
IMPORTANT: Lubricate until grease appears at both
ends of pivot pin.
32
17
OPERATION 18
LUBRICATE FWD SUPERSTEER AXLE KINGPIN

BEARINGS (two fittings on each axle end) -
Figure 33
33
OPERATION 19
LUBRICATE FWD SUPERSTEER AXLE TIE ROD

ENDS (two fittings on each tie rod) - Figure 34
34
OPERATION 20
LUBRICATE FWD SUPERSTEER AXLE

CYLINDERS (two fittings on each cylinder) -
Figure 35
35
18
SECTION 3
OPERATION 21
LUBRICATE FWD SUPERSTEER AXLE REAR

PIVOT - Figure 36
36
OPERATION 22
LUBRICATE FWD SUPERSTEER AXLE DRIVE

SHAFT SPLINE - Figure 37
37
OPERATION 23
LUBRICATE 3-POINT HITCH LINKAGE -

Figure 38
(2 fittings on each vertical link, 1 on each assister ram
and 2 fittings on the top link)
NOTE: Lubricate at 10-hour intervals when operating


specification. 38
19
OPERATION 24
LUBRICATE ROLLER DRAWBAR (where fitted) -

Figure 39
NOTE: Lubricate at 10-hour intervals when operating


specification.
39
EVERY 300 HOURS

Complete the preceding operations, plus
the following:
OPERATION 25
CHANGE ENGINE OIL AND FILTER - Figures 40

to 43
IMPORTANT: The sulphur content of diesel fuel
affects the engine oil and filter change interval as
shown in the following chart:
Sulphur Content Oil Change Interval

Below 0.5% 300 hours
0.5 - 1.0% 150 hours
1.0 - 1.3% 75 hours
40
The use of fuel with a sulphur content above 1.3% is

not recommended.
To change the oil and filter:

IMPORTANT: Cold weather operation affects the oil
change interval. When operating in temperatures
below - 12° C (10° F), change the oil and filter every 1. Remove the engine oil drain plug (1) and catch
150 hours of operation. the oil in a suitable container. Dispose of oil and
filter properly. See Figure 40.
Change the oil and filter after the engine has been run 2. Replace the drain plug after oil has drained.
until it is warm. Park tractor on level ground and stop
3. Clean the oil filter area.
engine. Engage park brake.
4. Remove the oil filter (1). See Figure 41.
WARNING: Be very careful to avoid contact 5. Clean the filter mounting surface (2).
with hot engine oil. If the engine oil is
extremely hot, allow to cool to a moderately warm 6. Apply a thin film of clean oil on the new oil filter
temperature before proceeding. sealing ring (3).
20
SECTION 3
7. Install filter and turn until the sealing ring contacts

the mounting surface, then tighten an additional
3/ to 1 full turn. Do not overtighten.
4
8. Remove the filler cap (1) Figure 42 and fill with

approximately 4 gallons (19 litres) of fresh oil of
the grade and viscosity detailed inside the rear
cover.
9. Remove the cover from the right side ‘B’ pillar to

gain access to the main electrical distribution
panel. See Operation 59 for details on removing
the cover.
41
10. Remove the fuel solenoid relay (1) Figure 43

from the main distribution panel. This will prevent
the engine from starting.
11. Crank the engine for 20 seconds. Wait one

minute. Repeat the procedure two more times.
IMPORTANT: Cranking the engine provides lubrica-

tion to the turbocharger and engine before starting
which will extend engine life.
12. Re-install the fuel solenoid relay (1) Figure 43

and ‘B’ pillar cover.
13. Run the engine at idle for 3 minutes, then stop the
engine.
42
14. Check drain plug and oil filter areas for leaks.
15. Wait 5 minutes to allow oil to drain into the

crankcase, then check the oil level on the dipstick
(2) Figure 42. The oil level should be in the
crosshatched area (3).
16. Add new oil as required until the oil level is in the
cross-hatched area.
NOTE: Do not fill above the upper line of the cross-

hatched area. Excessive oil will be burned off within
a short time and give a false impression of oil con-
sumption.
Oil Capacity 4.6 imp. gallons

(including filter) (21 litres) 43
21
OPERATION 26
CLEAN FUEL SEDIMENTER SCREEN -

Figure 44
To clean the sedimenter:
1. Remove the sedimenter bowl (1) from the lift

pump (2). Catch the fuel in a suitable container
and dispose of properly.
2. Remove the screen (4) and spring (5). Inspect the

O ring (3) and replace if damaged.
3. Clean the screen and bowl. Inspect the screen 44

and replace if damaged.
4. Install the spring and screen in the bowl. Fill the

bowl with clean, fresh fuel and re-install.
5. Depress the hand primer on the fuel filter manifold

repeatedly until resistance is felt and the
sedimenter bowl is full.
6. Start the engine and check for leaks.
NOTE: A partially plugged filter screen can cause re-

duced fuel supply to engine. This can cause low pow-
er performance.
IMPORTANT: If the engine does not start after crank-

ing for 20 seconds, the fuel system must be purged of
air. Refer to Operation 57 in this section.
OPERATION 27
CHECK FWD AXLE HOUSING OIL LEVEL -

Figure 45
To check the oil level:
1. Park the tractor on level ground and block the

wheels front and back.
2. Remove the level/filler plug (1).
3. Check that the oil level is to the bottom of the

level/filler plug hole.
4. Add new oil, as required and re-install the

level/filler plug.
See inside rear cover for the correct oil specification. 45
22
SECTION 3
OPERATION 28
CHECK FWD AXLE HUB OIL LEVEL - Figure 46

To check the oil level:
1. Rotate the hub so the arrow (1) points straight

down.
2. Park the tractor on level ground and block the

wheels front and rear.
3. Remove the level/filler plug (2). 46
4. Check that the oil level is at the bottom of the

level/filler plug hole.
5. Add new oil as required.
6. Re-install level/filler plug.
Repeat on the other hub.
OPERATION 29
CHECK A/C RECEIVER DRIER SIGHT GLASS

AND MOISTURE INDICATOR - Figures 47 and
48
Check the sight glass for bubbles and the colour of the
moisture indicator when the outside temperature is
21° C (70° F) or warmer.
To check the sight glass:
1. Start engine and run at 2000 rev/min.
2. Depress A/C switch (1) Figure 47.
3. Turn the temperature switch (2) fully anti-

clockwise and the blower switch (3) fully
clockwise. 47
23
4. Inspect the sight glass (1) Figure 48 ten minutes

after depressing the A/C switch. The compressor
must be turning when inspecting the sight glass.
If bubbles are visible in the sight glass or the moisture

indicator (2) is pink in colour, the air conditioning sys-
tem should be serviced. Contact your authorised
dealer.
IMPORTANT: Do not allow R-134A refrigerant to es-

cape into the atmosphere. Your authorised dealer
has the proper handling and recycling equipment to 48
service the system.
WARNING: The air conditioning system

contains environmentally safe R134A
refrigerant. R134A is not compatible with R12
refrigerant. Do not use gauges or test equipment
previously used with R12 refrigerant as damage to
the system will result.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to service the air

conditioning system. It is possible to be
severely frostbitten or injured by escaping refrigerant.
OPERATION 30
DRAIN THE FUEL TANK - Figure 49

To drain:
1. Park the tractor with the front wheels on a slight

upgrade and block the wheels front and rear.
2. Open drain cock (1) until water and sediment are

eliminated. Catch the fuel in a suitable container
and dispose of the fuel properly.
3. Close the drain cock when clean fuel appears. 49
24
SECTION 3
OPERATION 31
CHECK BATTERY ELECTROLYTE LEVEL -

Figure 50
Check electrolyte level with the engine stopped, trac-
tor on level ground and the batteries cold.
To check:
1. Remove battery box cover and clean the top of

the batteries with a damp cloth.
2. Remove the six filler plugs (1) from each battery. 50
3. Check that the electrolyte level is 0.25 in.(6 mm)

below the filler neck of each cell.
4. Add distilled or demineralised water, as required.

Do not overfill.
5. Replace all filler plugs.
6. Check for loose cable connections (2) or loose

battery clamps (3). Tighten as required.
7. Replace the battery cover.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulphuric acid.

In case of contact with skin, flush the affected
area with water for five minutes. Seek medical atten-
tion immediately.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear

eye protection when working near batteries.
OPERATION 32
CHECK SHIFT QUALITY - POWERSHIFT

TRANSMISSION
Drive the tractor until the transmission oil is at normal
operating temperature. Check the quality of the shift
in all ratios. If found to be harsh or abrupt or if the trac-
tor is used or will be used in arduous conditions, carry
out the clutch calibration procedure.
For details, see Operation 51.
25
OPERATION 33
WASH CAB AIR FILTER - Figure 51

Before servicing the filter, switch off the blower and
close all windows and one door. Slam the other door
closed. The resulting back pressure will dislodge
most of the loose dirt from the underside of the filter.
NOTE: In humid conditions, such as occur on most

early mornings, do not switch on the blower prior to
servicing the filter. Damp particles drawn into the filter
may be difficult to remove without washing.
51
NOTE: The filter is made of specially treated paper
with a rubber sealing strip bonded to the upper sur-
face. Do not damage the element during removal.
1. Loosen the filter cover retaining screw (1) and

lower the front of the filter cover (2).
NOTE: The filter cover is hinged at the back.
2. Remove the filter element (3).
3. Soak the filter for 15 minutes in warm water

containing a small amount of mild detergent. The
side of the filter with the sealing strip should
remain above the surface of the water.
4. Rinse the filter with running water below 40 lbf/in2

(2.8 bar). Direct the water through the filter in the
opposite direction of the normal air flow.
5. Shake off the excess water. Position the filter with

the seal side up and allow to dry naturally.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to dry the filter with heat

or compressed air and do not install until thoroughly
dry as the filter may rupture. It is recommended that
a new filter be installed at this service and the washed
filter put aside for installation at a subsequent service.
Store the spare filter in a dry place and wrap it to pre-
6. Clean the filter chamber with a damp, lint-free

cloth.
7. Install the filter with the rubber seal (4) facing the
cab roof.
26
SECTION 3
8. Close the front of the cover and tighten the

retaining screw.
NOTE: Wash the filter more frequently when operat-

ing in extremely dusty conditions.
IMPORTANT: Replace the filter if pinholes can be

seen when the filter is held up to a strong light, when
the filter is dark and dirty appearing after washing,
when the metal housing is bent or when the seal is
damaged.

remove dust from the air but will not exclude
chemicals.
OPERATION 34
CLEAN THE CAB RECIRCULATION FILTER -

Figure 52
To clean:
1. Remove the two retaining screws (1) from the

cover (2).
2. Remove the cover and the filter (3).
3. Soak the filter for 15 minutes in warm water

containing a little mild detergent.
4. Rinse the filter with running water below 20 lbf/in2 52

(1.4 bar).
5. Shake off the excess water and allow to air dry.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to dry the filter with heat

or compressed air and do not install until thoroughly
dry as the filter may rupture. It is recommended that
a new filter is installed at this service and the washed
one put aside for installation at a subsequent service.
Store the spare filter in a dry place and wrap it to pre-
6. Install the filter, cover and retaining screws.
NOTE: Wash the filter more frequently when operat-

ing in extremely dusty conditions.
IMPORTANT: Replace the filter when holes or tears

are visible.
27
OPERATION 35
CHECK SAFETY CAB MOUNTING BOLT

TORQUE - Figures 53, 54 and 55
Check the torque of the cab mounting bolts and the
mounting bracket bolts:
FRONT CAB MOUNTS - All Models - Figure 53

Remove the sill plate (1) and fold back the floor mat
(2) to access the front cab mounting bolts (3). Torque
the mounting bolts as specified. Repeat on the other
front mount.
53
Cab mounting bolts (3): 160 lbf. ft. (217 Nm).
Mounting bracket to
transmission bolts (5): 177 lbf. ft. (239 Nm).
REAR CAB MOUNTS - 170 h.p. Model - Figure 54

Torque bolts as specified. Repeat on the other rear
mount.
Mounting bracket to
rear axle bolts (2): 226 lbf. ft. (306 Nm)
54
REAR CAB MOUNTS - 190 h.p., 210 h.p. and 240

h.p. Models - Figure 55
Torque bolts as specified. Repeat on the other rear
mount.
Mounting bracket to
rear axle bolts (2): 177 lbf. ft. (239 Nm).
55
28
SECTION 3
EVERY 600 HOURS

Complete the preceding operations plus the
following:
OPERATION 36
CHANGE ENGINE AIR CLEANER OUTER FILTER

- Figures 56 and 57
To change the filter:
1. Unscrew the wing nut (1) and remove the filter

cover (2). The wing nut is attached to the cover. 56
See Figure 56.

filter (2). See Figure 57.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove or disturb the inner filter.

damp, lint-free cloth on a probe. Do not damage
the inner filter (3).
4. Install a new outer filter and tighten the wing nut.
57
NOTE: Replace the wing nut seal if it is damaged.
5. Re-install the air cleaner cover and tighten the

wing nut.
OPERATION 37
CHECK ENGINE AIR INTAKE CONNECTIONS -

170 and 190 h.p. Models - Figure 58
Check all intake system connections on the left-hand

side of the engine for proper sealing and the clamps
for tightness.
58
29
OPERATION 37
CHECK ENGINE AIR INTAKE CONNECTIONS -

170 and 190 h.p. Models - Figure 59
Check all intake system connections on the right-

hand side of the engine for proper sealing and the
clamps for tightness.
59
OPERATION 37
CHECK ENGINE AIR INTAKE CONNECTIONS - 60

210 and 240 h.p. Models - Figures 60 and 61
Check all intake system connections on the left- and
right-hand side of the engine for proper sealing and
the clamps for tightness.
61
30
SECTION 3
OPERATION 38
CHANGE FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR -

Figures 62 and 63
1. Hold the filter (1) so it cannot turn. See Figure 62.
2. Unscrew the plastic water separator bowl (2) from

62
the filter. Do not damage the bowl or lose the O
ring (3). Catch the fuel in a suitable container and
dispose of properly.
3. Remove the filter (1) Figure 63 and dispose of the

filter properly.
4. Clean the filter mounting surface (2).
5. Install the O ring and plastic water separator bowl

on the new filter. Hand tighten only.
6. Fill the filter with clean, fresh diesel fuel.
63
7. Coat the filter seal (3) with diesel fuel.
8. Install the filter until the seal contacts the mount,

then tighten an additional 1/2 turn.
9. Depress and release the hand primer (4) until

resistance is felt indicating that the filter is full.
10. Start the engine and check for fuel leaks.
IMPORTANT: If the engine does not start after crank-

ing for 20 seconds, the fuel system must be purged of
air. Refer to Operation 57 in this section.
31
OPERATION 39
CHANGE ROCKER COVER VENTILATION

FILTER - Figure 64
1. Remove the ventilation tube bracket retaining bolt

(1).
2. Remove the ventilation tube (2) from the rocker

cover (3).
64
3. Remove the ventilation tube grommet (4).
4. Pull out the filter (5) and discard it.
5. Fold the new filter in half and install.
6. Unfold the filter inside the rocker cover.
7. Install the ventilation tube grommet (4).
8. Install the ventilation tube.
9. Install the ventilation tube bracket retaining bolt

(1).
OPERATION 40
CHECK AIR CONDITIONER DRAIN TUBES -

Figure 65
Check that the four drain tubes and end caps are
open.
NOTE: There are two tubes on each side of the trac-

tor.
One tube (1) travels down and exits beneath each of

the front cab ‘A’ pillars. One tube (2) travels down and
exits beneath each of the cab ‘B’ pillars. 65
32
SECTION 3
EVERY 900 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS

(whichever occurs first) - Complete
the appropriate preceding operations plus
the following:
OPERATION 41
CHANGE TRANSMISSION/REAR AXLE/-

HYDRAULIC OIL - Figure 66 and Figure 67
NOTE: Perform this operation in conjunction with Op-
erations 42, 43 and 44.
66
Prior to changing the oil, run the engine and operate
the hydraulic system until the oil is warm. Park the
tractor on level ground, lower the three-point linkage
and stop the engine. Engage the park brake and block
wheels on both sides.
WARNING: Be very careful to avoid contact

with hot oil. If oil is extremely hot, allow it to
cool to a moderately warm temperature before pro-
ceeding.
To change the oil:
1. Remove the drain plug (1) Figure 66 and catch

the oil in a suitable container. Dispose of the oil
properly.
67
2. Install the drain plug.
IMPORTANT: Perform operations 42, 43 and 44 be-

fore refilling with oil.
3. Remove the filler cap (1) Figure 67 and refill with

new oil.
4. Run the engine and operate the hydraulic

system. Fully raise the three-point linkage.
5. Stop the engine and wait five minutes while

checking the system for leaks.
Oil Capacity:
6. Check the oil level by means of the dipstick (2). 170 h.p. 25.7 Imp. gal. (117 litres)
Add oil as required to bring the oil level to the full 190, 210 and 240 h.p. 30.8 Imp gal. (140 litres)
mark (3).
NOTE: Capacities listed are for a completely drained
NOTE: Do not fill above the full mark. system. The normal refill quantity will be approxi-
mately 5 Imp. gal. (23 litres) less, due to oil retained
See inside rear cover for the correct oil specification. within the system.
33
OPERATION 42
CLEAN HYDRAULIC PUMP INLET SCREEN -

Figures 68, 69, and 70
NOTE: Perform this operation while the oil is drained
in Operation 41.
NOTE: Clean inlet screen area before proceeding.
To clean the inlet screen:
1. Remove the three attaching bolts (1) from the end

68
cover (2). See Figure 68.
2. Pull the end cover (1) Figure 69 down until it is

free of the coupler (2).
NOTE: Do not damage the ‘O’ rings (3) and (4) when
removing the end cover.
3. Remove the suction screen (1) Figure 70 by

turning it anti-clockwise.
4. Clean the area where the suction screen is

located.
5. Clean and inspect the suction screen and all ‘O’ 69

rings. Replace if damaged.
6. Install the suction screen. Turn clockwise until

hand tight, then turn an additional 1/4 turn. Do not
over tighten.
7. Install the ‘O’ ring (2 Figure 70) on the housing

and lubricate with oil.
8. Oil the exposed ‘O’ ring (3) on the coupler.
9. Install the end cover and coupler. Do not damage

the ‘O’ rings.
10. Install the attaching bolts and torque to 70 lbf. ft. (95
Nm). 70
34
SECTION 3
OPERATION 43
CHANGE TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER -

Figure 71
in Operation 41.
NOTE: Clean filter area before proceeding.
1. Remove the filter (1). Dispose of the filter

properly.
2. Discard the ‘O’ ring (2). 71
3. Clean the filter manifold seal surface (3).
4. Coat the new ‘O’ ring (2) with clean oil.
5. Install the filter and tighten.
OPERATION 44
CHANGE HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER - Figure 72

in Operation 41.
NOTE: Clean the filter area before proceeding.
1. Remove the filter (1). Dispose of the filter

properly.
2. Discard the ‘O’ ring (2).

72
3. Clean the filter manifold seal surface (3).
4. Coat the new ‘O’ ring (2) with clean oil.
5. Install the filter and tighten.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to install the correct size filter.
NOTE: Two different size filters are used on the hy-

draulic system. The filter diameter differs as listed be-
low:
Standard hydraulic system 4 in. (157 mm)
MegaFlow and MegaFlow ready

hydraulic system 5 in. (197 mm)
35

the following:
OPERATION 45
CHANGE ENGINE AIR CLEANER INNER AND

OUTER FILTER ELEMENTS - Figures 73 and 74
To change the filters:
1. Unscrew the wing nut (1) Figure 73 and remove 73

the outer cover (2).
2. Unscrew the wing nut (1) Figure 74 and remove

the outer filter element (2).
3. Unscrew the wing nut (3) and remove the inner

filter element (4).

damp, lint-free cloth.
5. Check the seals on the wing nuts and replace if

damaged.
6. Install new inner filter element (4) and tighten

wing nut (3) hand tight.
7. Install new outer filter element (2) and tighten 74

wing nut (1) hand tight.
8. Install air cleaner filter cover and tighten wing nut

hand tight.
IMPORTANT: Failure to install the inner filter element

properly could result in engine damage. Therefore it
is recommended that the element be installed by an
authorised dealer.
36
SECTION 3
OPERATION 46
CHECK ENGINE VALVE CLEARANCE -

Figure 75
Check the valve clearance with the engine cold.
The correct valve clearance is:
Inlet 0.014 - 0.018 in. (0.36 - 0.46 mm)

Exhaust 0.017 - 0.021 in. (0.43 - 0.53 mm)
Remove the rocker cover and adjust as follows:
1. Turn the crankshaft until any pair of valves in the

‘Valves Open’ column is fully open. Check and
75
adjust the corresponding pairs of valves in the
‘Valves to Adjust’ column.
Valves Open Valves to Adjust

1 inlet/3 exhaust 4 exhaust/6 inlet
2 exhaust/3 inlet 4 inlet/5 exhaust
2. Slide a feeler gauge (1) of the correct thickness

between the valve stem (2) and rocker arm (3).
3. Turn the rocker arm adjusting screw (4) until the

correct clearance is obtained. Turn the screw
clockwise to reduce clearance and anti-
clockwise to increase clearance.
4. Repeat the process until all the valves have been

checked and adjusted.
5. Install the rocker cover. Use a new gasket if the 76

original shows signs of damage.
OPERATION 47
CHANGE FWD DIFFERENTIAL OIL - Figure 76 2. Re-install the drain plug (1) and remove level/filler
Park the tractor on level ground and engage the park plug (2).
brake.
3. Add the contents of one 16 fl. oz. (0.5 litre) bottle
To change the oil: of recommended slip additive G70/LS.
1. Remove the drain plug (1) and completely drain 4. Fill with new oil until it reaches the bottom of the
all oil into a suitable container. Dispose of the oil level/filler plug hole. Re-install level/filler plug.
properly. See inside rear cover for the correct oil specification.
NOTE: The SuperSteer axle must be turned to full left Oil Capacity: 13 Imp. pints. (12.3 litres)
or right lock to access the drain plug. plus 16 fl. oz. (0.5 litre) of additive.
37
OPERATION 48
CHANGE FWD PLANETARY HUB OIL - Figure 77

Park the tractor on level ground and engage the park
brake. To change the oil:
1. Position the wheel so the filler/drain/level plug is

at the lowest point (1). Remove the plug and
completely drain all oil into a suitable container.
Dispose of the oil properly.
2. Rotate the wheel so the arrow (2) is pointing

straight down.
3. Refill the hub with new oil until it reaches the 77

bottom of the filler/drain/level plug hole (3). Install
the filler/drain/level plug.
4. Repeat the process on the other hub.
Oil Capacity (each hub):

170 h.p. Models with
standard FWD: 2.8 Imp. pints (1.6 litres)
190, 210, 240 h.p. Models with standard FWD and all
models with SuperSteer: 2.3 Imp. pints (1.3 litres)
OPERATION 49
CHANGE CAB AIR FILTER - Figure 78

1. Loosen the filter cover retaining screw (1) and

lower the front of the filter cover (2).
NOTE: The filter cover is hinged at the rear.
2. Remove the filter element (3) and discard.
3. Clean the filter chamber with a damp cloth.
4. Install a new filter with the rubber seal (4)

uppermost. Close the cover and tighten the
retaining screw.

remove dust from the air but will not exclude
chemicals. 78
38
SECTION 3
OPERATION 50
CHANGE ENGINE COOLANT FILTER/-

CONDITIONER - Figure 79
A replaceable coolant filter/conditioner is installed on
the tractor. The filter/conditioner canister contains a
filter element and a conditioner in the form of a paste.
As coolant flows through the filter, the paste dissolves
and mixes with the coolant to provide optimum engine
corrosion protection.
The conditioner in the filter will:
• Increase rust prevention. 79
• Reduce scale formation.
• Minimise cylinder wall erosion (pitting).
• Reduce foaming of the coolant.
As the conditioner works and protects the system, it

gradually loses its strength and must be replenished.
Replacing the filter at the specified interval ensures
maximum protection.
IMPORTANT: The new filter contains a measured

amount of chemical inhibitor in paste form. The
amount of conditioner and the size of the filter element
are matched to the cooling capacity of the tractor. It is
important that this filter is changed every 1200 hours 1. Close both shutoff valves (1).
if total protection of the engine cooling system is to be
maintained. The use of a non-approved filter may 2. Remove the filter (2) and dispose of properly.
jeopardize this protection.
3. Lubricate the filter seal (3) on the new filter with
IMPORTANT: Install a new filter/conditioner in the clean oil.
event of a large coolant loss such as a failed coolant
hose, etc.
4. Clean the filter manifold sealing surface (4).
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the filter/conditioner

5. Install the new filter until the seal contacts the
more frequently than specified unless a large coolant
manifold. Tighten an additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn. Do
loss occurs.
not overtighten.
IMPORTANT: Anti-leak additives should not be used.

6. Open both shutoff valves.
The clogging properties of these additives could af-
fect the performance of the filter and conditioner.
7. Start the engine and run it for 5 minutes.
CAUTION: Only change the filter when the
engine is cool. 8. Check the filter area for leaks.
39
80
OPERATION 51 1. Park the tractor on level ground away from any

obstacles in case of unexpected tractor
CHECK POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION CLUTCH movement. Stop the engine and place remote
CALIBRATION - Figures 80 through Figure 82 hydraulic controls in the neutral position.
NOTE: The Powershift transmission has three direc-
tional clutches. Calibrate the clutches periodically to 2. Engage the parking brake and block the wheels,
compensate for wear. This service should be per- front and rear.
formed at the first 50 hour service and every 1200
hours thereafter. Clutch calibration should be carried NOTE: The liquid crystal display will flash ‘P’ if the
out more frequently (every 300 hours) if a deteriora- parking brake is not properly applied.
tion in shift quality is noted. It is recommended that
this operation be performed by an authorised dealer. 3. Turn off the air conditioning.
WARNING: Before carrying out the calibra- 4. Move the transmission control lever to the neutral
tion procedure, firmly apply the parking brake downshift position (to the left) and hold it there.
and block the wheels, front and rear. While holding it there, turn the key-start switch to
the run position.
IMPORTANT: During the calibration procedure, the
electronic management system detects precisely the 5. Start the engine. The full LCD will be displayed.
point at which the clutches start to engage. This en-
gagement is detected by a very small reduction in en- 6. Release the speed control lever 5 to 7 seconds
gine speed. During calibration, it is essential that no after the engine starts.
action is taken to cause the engine speed to vary. Be
sure that the air conditioner and all electrical equip- 7. Verify that the digital display is showing a steady
ment is switched off. Do not operate the PTO or any ‘CC’ indicating that the electronic management
hydraulic lever or move the hand or foot throttle. system is in the clutch calibration mode.
NOTE: Repeat steps 1 through 7 if ‘CC’ is not dis-

Preparing the Tractor for Calibration - Figure 80 played.
NOTE: The clutches should be adjusted when the oil
is at normal operating temperatures. 8. Adjust engine speed to 1200 ± 30 rev/min.
Prior to calibrating the directional clutches, carry out 9. If ‘CC’ is displayed, proceed to calibrate the
the following: See Figure 80. clutches.
40
SECTION 3
Calibrate F1 Directional Clutch - Figure 81

To calibrate the low range directional clutch (F1):
1. Move the speed control lever to the forward

position.
2. Verify that the display shows a flashing ‘CC’.
3. Move the speed control lever to the left and hold it

there.
NOTE: During calibration, if wheel movement is de-

tected ‘F’ will flash, indicating failure of the procedure.
Handbrake application and blocking of the wheels will
81
need to be rechecked before the calibration proce-
dure can restart.
4. Observe the digital display. It will flash ‘20’ for

approximately 4 seconds, then the number
displayed will increase by one digit every second
until the reading becomes steady. A steady
reading indicates that clutch F1 is calibrated.
5. Return the speed control lever to the neutral

position after the clutch is calibrated.
6. Verify that the digital display still shows a flashing

‘CC’.
Calibrate F2 Directional Clutch - Figure 82

To calibrate the high range directional clutch (F2):
82
1. Move the speed control lever to the forward
position.
2. Verify that the display shows a flashing ‘CC’.
3. Move the speed control lever to the right and hold

it there.

reading indicates that clutch F2 is calibrated.

6. Verify that the digital display still shows a flashing

‘CC’.
41
Calibrate Reverse Directional Clutch - Figure 83

To calibrate the reverse range directional clutch:
1. Move the speed control lever to the reverse

position.
2. Verify that the display still shows a flashing ‘CC’.
3. Move the speed control to the right and hold it

there.
83

reading indicates that the reverse range clutch is
calibrated.

6. Verify that the digital display shown is stll flashing

‘CC’.
TO EXIT THE CALIBRATION MODE

To exit the calibration mode:
1. Stop the engine and wait 10 seconds before

proceeding.
2. Start the engine in the normal manner.
3. Verify that with the speed control lever in the

neutral position the digital display indicates ‘N5’.
The tractor is now ready for normal operation.
42
SECTION 3

the following:
OPERATION 52
CHECK AND CLEAN FUEL INJECTORS -

Figures 84 and 85
IMPORTANT: The injectors should be cleaned and
adjusted by an authorised dealer or an injector spe-
cialist.
84
WARNING: Diesel fuel escaping under pres-
sure can penetrate the skin causing serious
injury.
• Do not use your hand to check for leaks. Use a

piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
Wear eye protection.
• Stop the engine and relieve pressure before

connecting or disconnecting lines.

If any fluid is injected into the skin, obtain medical

attention immediately or gangrene may result.

IMPORTANT: Remove and replace one injector at a

time. This will reduce the chance of dirt entering the
engine through the injector opening. Place caps on all
open lines or injector openings to prevent the entry of
dirt.
The following text assumes that you have a spare set

of injectors which have been cleaned and adjusted
and are ready to be installed. Use the following proce-
dure to remove and replace the injectors:
1. Disconnect the high pressure injector line (1)

from the injector (2). See Figure 84.
2. Remove the leak off line retaining bolt (3).
3. Remove the leak off line (4) and discard the two
copper washers (one on either side of the banjo
fitting). 85
43
4. Remove the injector retaining bolts and washers The injectors which were removed should be
(1) Figure 85 and hold-down clamp (2). serviced by an authorised dealer and retained for use
at the next service interval.
5. Turn the injector (3) clockwise to loosen it, then

remove from the head.
NOTE: Unauthorised modification or adjustment of
fuel injection equipment outside specification will
6. Remove the copper sealing washer (4) from the
invalidate the warranty.
injector. If the washer is not on the injector it has
remained in the head and must be extracted.
Discard the copper washers.
7. Remove the cork dust seal (5) from the injector.

OPERATION 53
8. Install a new cork dust seal on the replacement CHANGE ENGINE COOLANT AND FILTER/-
injector. CONDITIONER - Figures 86 to 91
The rust and corrosion inhibitors in the antifreeze and
9. Install a new copper washer on the end of the the filter/conditioner deteriorate with use and require
injector. replacement on a regular basis.
10. Install the injector.

The tractor is equipped with a water filter with coolant
conditioner. The water filter/conditioner removes
11. Install the hold-down clamp. foreign material from the cooling system, controls rust
and conditions the coolant to prevent erosion and
cavitation in the cooling system.
NOTE: Be sure to install the clamp with the raised
side facing up.
See Operation 50 for additional information on the

12. Install the retaining bolts and washers. Torque the
filter/conditioner.
bolts evenly to 17 lbf. ft. (22 Nm).
13. Install the leak off line using new copper washers
WARNING: The coolant system operates un-
(6) on either side of the banjo fitting.
der pressure which is controlled by the radia-
tor pressure cap. It is dangerous to remove the pres-
14. Torque the leak off line retaining bolt (7) to 40 lbf. in. sure cap while the system is hot. When the system
(4.5 Nm). has cooled, use a thick cloth and turn the cap slowly to
the first stop and allow the pressure to escape before
fully removing the cap. Coolant should be kept off the
15. Install the high pressure line and tighten the
skin. Adhere to the precautions outlined on the anti-
connector to 18 lbf. ft. (24 Nm).
freeze and inhibitor containers, where used.
16. Repeat the process on the remaining injectors.
Park the tractor on level ground, engage the parking

17. Bleed the fuel system as detailed in Operation 57 brake and block the wheels front and rear.
in this section.
18. Start the engine and visually inspect for leaks. To change coolant and the filter/conditioner:
44
SECTION 3
WARNING: Allow the engine to cool before

draining the coolant.
1. Turn the heater control knob to the maximum heat

position.
2. Check that the heater shutoff valves (1) Figure 86

are open.
3. Open the drain plug (1) Figure 87 on the radiator

and drain all the coolant into a suitable container.
Dispose of the coolant properly.
WARNING: Coolant should be kept off the 86

skin. Adhere to the precautions outlined on
the antifreeze container.
4. Remove the drain plug (1) Figure 88 from the left

rear of the engine block. Drain all the coolant into
a suitable container. Dispose of the coolant
properly.
5. Remove the radiator cap (1) Figure 89 to

increase the drainage rate.
6. Close the shutoff valves (1) Figure 90 at the

filter/conditioner (2).
7. Remove the filter/conditioner.
8. Flush the system with a commercial coolant

system cleaner. Follow the instructions supplied 87
with the cleaner. Drain the cleaner and let the
engine cool.
IMPORTANT: Never put cold coolant in a hot engine.

The difference in temperature could cause the block
or head to crack.
9. Fill the system with clean water.
10. Run engine for 10 minutes, then drain all the

water. Allow the engine to cool.
11. Close all drain plugs.
12. Coat the filter seal (3) with oil. Wipe the sealing
surface of the filter manifold (4) and install the filter
until the gasket contacts the manifold. Tighten an
additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn. Do not overtighten. 88
45
13. Open the shutoff valves (1) at the filter manifold.
14. Inspect cooling system hoses and connections

for leaks.
15. Fill the cooling system with a 50/50 blend of low

silicate antifreeze and clean, soft water. Add coolant
slowly through the radiator filler neck until the
coolant is to the bottom of the filler neck.
NOTE: To avoid trapping air in the system, fill the ra-

diator as slowly as practicable thereby allowing any
air pockets to disperse.
16. Fill the coolant recovery tank (1) Figure 91 to the 89

lowest mark (2).
17. Start the engine and run it until normal operating

temperature is reached.
NOTE: The coolant level will drop as coolant is

pumped around the system.
18. Stop the engine and allow the coolant to cool.
19. Remove the radiator cap and add coolant to the

radiator to bring the coolant level to the bottom of
the filler neck. Install the radiator cap. Add coolant
to the recovery tank as required to bring the level
up to the cold mark.
NOTE: If the engine is not going to be operated im-

mediately following the coolant and filter change, run
the engine for one hour to ensure that the chemical 90
conditioner within the filter is dispersed into the cool-
ing system.
See inside rear cover for the correct Antifreeze speci-

fication.
Clean Water Specification (Maximum):

Total Hardness 300 parts per million
Chlorides 100 parts per million
Sulphates 100 parts per million
Coolant Capacity
170 and 190 h.p. Models 5.5 Imp. gallons
(25 litres)
210 h.p. and 240 h.p. Models 5.8 Imp gallons

(26.4 litres) 91
46
SECTION 3
GENERAL MAINTENANCE (As re-

quired)
OPERATION 54
ADJUST PARKING BRAKE - Figures 92 and 93

The parking brake should be fully applied when the
parking brake lever is raised to the third or fourth
notch (click) on the quadrant.
IMPORTANT: Adjust the parking brake if the lever

needs to be raised above the fourth notch on the
quadrant to fully apply the parking brake.
92
Adjust the parking brake with the tractor parked on
level ground, the engine off and the wheels blocked
front and rear.
To adjust the parking brake:
1. Position the parking brake lever (1) Figure 92 in

the fully lowered ‘0’ position.
2. Raise the park brake handle to the second notch

on the quadrant.
3. Loosen the front locknut (1) Figure 93 as far as

possible on the cable housing (2).
4. Pull the cable housing (2) rearward until a 20 lb. (9

kg) resistance is felt. Hold in this position.
5. Tighten the rear lock nut (3) until it contacts the

bracket (4). Do not overtighten. Tighten both lock
nuts (1) and (3) against the bracket (4). 93
7. Raise the parking brake lever and check for

correct adjustment.
OPERATION 55
CHECK WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID LEVEL -

Figure 94
To add fluid to the windscreen washer reservoir:
1. Remove the filler cap (1).
2. Add washer solvent until the reservoir (2) is full.
3. Replace the filler cap.
IMPORTANT: In cold weather use a washer solvent

with antifreeze properties. 94
47
OPERATION 56
ADJUST THE HOOD GAS STRUTS - Figure 95

The gas struts (1) are installed at the factory in the
rear mount hole (2). The struts can be installed in the
front mount hole to provide additional lift assistance,
if required.
To reposition a gas strut:
1. Open the hood to the fully raised position.
CAUTION: Fully support the hood before re-

moving either gas strut. 95
2. Support the hood with a sling or prop rod to

prevent the hood from closing when a gas strut is
removed.
NOTE: Change the location of one gas strut then

change the position of the other gas strut.
3. Unscrew the pivot ball (3) from the mount hole.
4. Position the pivot ball in the desired mount hole

and tighten to 40 lbf. ft. (54 Nm).
5. Repeat for the other gas strut.
6. Remove the support sling or prop rod.
7. Check the operation of the gas struts.
OPERATION 57
BLEED THE FUEL SYSTEM - Figure 96

To bleed the system, use the following procedure:
NOTE: There must be a minimum of 4.2 Imp. gallons

(19 litres) of fuel in the tank to ensure that priming can
be achieved.
1. Open the bleed screw (1) on the fuel filter

manifold.
2. Pump the hand primer (2) until fuel free of air

bubbles escapes from the bleed screw.
3. Close the bleed screw. 96
48
SECTION 3
4. Pump the hand primer an additional 30 pumps.
5. Crank engine for a maximum of 30 seconds.

While cranking depress the foot accelerator to the
floor.
IMPORTANT: Do not crank the starter continually for

more than 30 seconds at a time. Let the starter cool
for two minutes between attempts.
97
NOTE: Keep the accelerator to the floor during rough
running until the engine is running smoothly, then
throttle back to idle.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 if the engine starts then

stalls.
NOTE: Repeat steps 1 through 6 and bleed the fuel

system if the engine does not start.
OPERATION 58
FUSE REPLACEMENT - Figure 98

Power is distributed from the battery to the main fuse
panel (1), to the main distribution panel (2) and then
to the individual circuits.
Automotive-style block fuses are used to protect cir-

cuits from overload.
IMPORTANT: Locate and correct the cause of a

blown fuse. Do not replace a blown fuse with another
of a different rating than specified.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the key switch is in the ‘off’

position when replacing a fuse. 98
49
Main Fuse Panel - Figures 99 and 100

The main fuse panel (1) Figure 99, is located at the
base of the right-hand console. To gain access to the
fuses, release the tabs (2) and remove the cover (3).
The main fuse panel has eight fuse locations. See

Figure 100.
Refer to the following table for fuse information and to

identify the circuit each protects: 99
Fuse Rating
#1
No. (amps) Colour Circuit
1 - - Not used #2
2 50 Red Main fuse I
#3
3 40 Orange Main trans-
mission fuse
#4
4 50 Red Main road
lamp fuse
#5
5 50 Red Main worklamp fuse

6 40 Orange Main fuse II #6
7 40 Orange Main accessory fuse
8 40 Orange Main implement
#7
socket fuse
#8
100
50
SECTION 3
1 3
4
2
3
6
4 7
8
5
6
10
7 11
12
8
13
9
14
10
101 11 15
16
12 17
18
13 19
20
14 21
22
15 23
Main Distribution Panel - Figures 101 and 102
The main distribution panel is located behind the cov- 24
er (1) Figure 101 on the right-hand ‘B’ pillar. To gain
25
access to the panel, release the latches (2) and re- 16
move the cover. 26
17 27
The panel has thirty fuse locations and seventeen 28
relay locations. See Figure 102.

29
30
Refer to the table for fuse and relay information in-

cluding the circuit each controls. 102
51
MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL
Fuse No. Rating Colour Circuit
1 10A Red Accessory socket

2 25A Clear Climate control
3 15A Blue Washer/wiper
4 20A Yellow Front/mid work lamps
5 20A Yellow Lower cab rear work lamps
6 15A Blue Upper cab rear work lamps
7 15A Blue Upper cab front work lamps
8 7.5A Brown Right-hand park lamp
9 7.5A Brown Left-hand park lamp
10 25A Clear Main work lamp
11 15A Blue Cigar/horn/beacon
12 15A Blue Brake lamp
13 15A Blue Hazard lamp
14 5A Tan Interior lamp
15 7.5A Brown Moveable console
16 20A Yellow Seat
17 7.5A Brown Radio power
18 20A Yellow Transmission shift control solenoids fuse No.1
19 20A Yellow Transmission forward/reverse shift control solenoids fuse No. 2
20 15A Blue Transmission forward/reverse shift control solenoids - PTO
21 5A Tan Right-hand console
22 5A Tan Front console
23 10A Blue Control modules switched power (VPWR)
24 15A Blue Turn signal
25 5A Tan Unswitched power - memory (KAPWR)
26 10A Red Ignition switch
27 15A Blue Cold start aid
28 15A Blue Road lamp high beam
29 15A Blue Road lamp low beam
30 15A Blue Implement monitor
RELAYS
Relay Relay
No. Circuit No. Circuit
1 Lower front and side work lamps 10 Auxiliary power No. 2

2 Lower cab rear work lamps 11 Transmission power
3 Upper cab rear work lamps 12 Auxiliary power No. 1
4 Upper cab front work lamps 13 Flasher module
5 Power take-off 14 Turn signal, flasher converter module
6 Transmission directional interrupt 15 Turn signal, flasher converter module
7 Brakes 16 Fuel solenoid - pull-in
8 Cold start 17 Implement power
9 Accessory
52
SECTION 3
OPERATION 59
REPLACE HEADLIGHT BULBS - Figure 103

IMPORTANT: All headlights have halogen bulbs.
Never touch a halogen bulb with your fingers. Natural
oil in the skin may cause the bulb to fail prematurely.
Always use a clean cloth or tissue when handling
halogen bulbs.
To replace a bulb:
1. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from

the bulb assembly (2).
103
2. Rotate the bulb assembly (2) anti-clockwise until

it disengages from the housing (3).
3. Remove the bulb assembly.
4. Install the new bulb assembly in the housing.
5. Rotate clockwise until the bulb assembly locks in

the housing.
6. Connect the wire harness connector.
7. If more than one bulb assembly was replaced,

check the operation of the lights to ensure that the
harness was reconnected correctly.
OPERATION 60
REPLACE WORKLAMP SEALED BEAM UNITS -

Figure 104
1. Remove the retaining screws (1).
2. Pull the sealed beam unit (2) from the case (3).
3. Disconnect the connectors (4).
4. Connect the new sealed beam unit to the

connectors.
5 Install the new sealed beam unit into the case.
6. Install the retaining screws. 104
53
OPERATION 61
REPLACE THE FENDER MOUNTED TURN

SIGNAL AND STOP LIGHT/PARKING LIGHT
BULBS - Figure 105
The turn signal bulbs are behind the amber lenses.
The stop light and parking light bulbs are behind the
red lenses.
To replace the bulbs:
1. Remove the retaining screws (1).
2. Remove the lens. 105
3. Remove the failed bulb by pressing the bulb in

and turning it anti-clockwise.
4. Install a new bulb by pushing the bulb in and

turning it clockwise until it locks in place.
5. Replace the lens and tighten the retaining

screws, while being careful to fit lens properly into
the rubber gasket base.
IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten the retaining

screws.
OPERATION 62
REPLACE ROOF MOUNTED TURN SIGNAL

BULBS (where fitted) - Figure 106
To replace the bulb:
1. Remove the retaining screws (1) then remove the

lens (2).
2. Remove the bulb (3) by pressing the bulb in and

turning it anti-clockwise.
3. Install a new bulb by pushing the bulb in and

turning it clockwise until it locks in place.
4. Replace the lens and tighten the two screws.
IMPORTANT: When replacing the lens, do not over-

tighten the retaining screws.
NOTE: The lens must fit inside the rubber seal (4) to
ensure a waterproof fit. 106
54
SECTION 3
OPERATION 63

BULB REPLACEMENT - Figures 107, 108
and 109
To replace a bulb:
1. Loosen the two retaining screws (1) Figure 107,

then pull the EIC away from the dash.
107
2. Disconnect the electrical connector (1)

Figure 108 and earth wire (2) from the rear of the
EIC.
3. Remove the rear cover retaining screws (3) and

remove the rear cover.
4. Remove the failed bulb assembly (1) Figure 109

by rotating 1/4 turn anti-clockwise with a small 108
screwdriver. Install a new bulb.
5. Re-install the rear cover.
6. Install the electrical connector and earth wire.
7. Install the EIC in the dash and tighten the two

retaining screws. 109
55
OPERATION 64 OPERATION 65
PREPARATION FOR TRACTOR STORAGE

PREPARING THE TRACTOR FOR USE AFTER
Before storing the tractor at the end of the season or STORAGE
for an extended period, the following precautions
Before placing the tractor in service after an extended
should be taken:
storage period, perform the following:
1. Clean the tractor.

1. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure and lower
the tractor to the ground.
2. Drain the engine and transmission/rear axle and
refill with clean oil.
2. Refill the fuel tanks.

3. Drain the fuel tanks and pour approximately two
gallons of special calibrating fuel into the tank.
Run the engine for at least 10 minutes to ensure 3. Check the radiator coolant level.
complete distribution of the calibrating fuel
throughout the injection system. See the next
item before running the engine.
4. Check all oil levels.
4. Check the radiator coolant level. If the coolant is

within 200 hours of the next change, drain, flush
and refill the system. Run the engine for one hour 5. Install fully charged batteries.
to disperse the coolant throughout the system.
6. Remove the exhaust pipe covering.

5. Using the tractor hydraulic system in Position
Control, raise the lift linkage and support the lift
arms in the raised position.
7. Prime the engine oil system as detailed in steps 9
through 12 of Operation 25.
6. Lubricate all grease fittings and lightly coat all
exposed hydraulic piston rods with petroleum
jelly, e.g., power steering cylinder rams, lift rams,
spool valves, etc. IMPORTANT: Priming the engine oil system provides
lubrication to the turbocharger and engine before
starting which will extend engine life.
7. Remove the batteries and store in a warm, dry
place. Recharge periodically to a minimum of
12.6 volts. Do not allow voltage to fall below 12.4
8. Start the engine and check that all instruments
volts.
and controls function correctly. Using the tractor
hydraulic system in Position Control, fully raise
the lift linkage and remove the supports.
8. Raise the tractor and place supports under the
axles to take the weight off the tyres.
9. Drive the tractor without a load to ensure that it is

9. Cover the exhaust pipe opening. operating satisfactorily.
56
SECTION 4
TROUBLESHOOTING AND FAULT FINDING
TROUBLESHOOTING
INTRODUCTION
The following information is intended as a guide to
assist in identifying and correcting possible tractor
malfunctions and fault conditions.
Information is divided into three headings:
S OPERATOR PROMPTS
S FAULT CODES
1
S SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
OPERATOR PROMPTS - Figure 1

Operator prompts (1) indicate that an operational
procedure has been performed out of sequence.
The ‘prompts’ are meant to advise the operator to
take correct action.
The following flashing prompts will be displayed on

the Electronic Instrument Cluster (EIC) gear shift
display.
PROMPT CAUSE CORRECTION

F Gear shift lever in forward while Return shift lever to neutral
starting
R Gear shift lever in reverse while Return shift lever to neutral
starting
P Park brake applied when gear Return shift lever to neutral and release park
selected brake
d Gear shift lever in downshift when Return shift lever to neutral
starting
U Gear shift lever in up shift while Return shift lever to neutral
starting
1
TROUBLE SHOOTING
FAULT CODES - Figure 2

A fault code indicates that there has been a mal-
function in the tractor electrical system. During nor-
mal operation, the READ YOUR MANUAL symbol
(1) will be displayed in the tractor performance
monitor (TPM) if a fault has occurred. Fault codes
(2) can be retrieved and view using the procedure
detailed in ‘Electronic Instrument Cluster - Operator
Calibration’ section.
1. Read Your Manual symbol

2. Fault code
Fault codes will be displayed as a flashing three dig- 2

it number preceded by the letter ‘F’. The code will
identify the circuit in which the malfunction has oc-
curred, along with the type of malfunction such as
short circuit, open circuit, etc.
The following chart identifies the system that corre-

sponds to the range of fault code numbers.
NOTE: Not all numbers in a range are used.
Contact your authorised dealer for assistance in

correcting a fault code.
FAULT CODE NUMBERS - SYSTEM

FAULT CODE NUMBERS SYSTEM
F000-F099 Electronic Draft Control

F100-F199 Right-hand Controls
F200-F299 Electronic Instrument Cluster
F300-F399 Electronic Transmission Control
F400-F499 Engine
SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
The following information lists possible problems, their cause and corrective action. The systems are listed as
follows:
Engine 3-point Hitch Cab
Transmission Brakes Hydraulic
Electrical
2
SECTION 4
ENGINE
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION
Engine will not start, or is difficult Incorrect starting procedure Review starting procedures
to start
Low or no fuel Check fuel level
Air in fuel lines Bleed fuel system
Incorrect engine oil viscosity Use correct viscosity oil
Incorrect fuel for operating Use correct type fuel for

temperature temperature conditions
Contaminated fuel system Clean system
Clogged sedimenter Clean sedimenter
Clogged fuel filter Replace filter element
Malfunctioning fuel injector(s) See your authorised dealer
Malfunctioning fuel solenoid or See your authorised dealer

solenoid relay
Engine runs rough and/or stalls Clogged sedimenter or fuel filter Clean sedimenter and replace filter
Contaminated fuel system Clean system
Fuel solenoid not properly adjusted See your authorised dealer
Malfunctioning fuel injector(s) See your authorised dealer
Engine does not develop full Engine overloaded Shift to lower gear or reduce load
power
Air cleaner restricted Service air cleaner
Clogged sedimenter or fuel filter Clean sedimenter and replace filter
Incorrect type of fuel Use correct fuel
Engine overheated See Engine Overheats
Low engine operating temperature Check thermostats
Implement incorrectly adjusted See implement operator’s manual
Incorrect valve clearance Check and adjust
3
TROUBLE SHOOTING
ENGINE
Engine does not develop full Malfunctioning fuel injector(s) Have authorised dealer check
power (cont.) injectors
High idle speed is low See your authorised dealer
Engine knocks Low oil level Add correct grade of oil
Low oil pressure See your authorised dealer
Engine overheated See Engine Overheats
Low engine operating temperature Malfunctioning thermostat(s) Replace thermostat(s)
Low oil pressure Low oil level Add oil as required
Wrong grade or viscosity oil Drain and refill with correct grade
and viscosity oil
Excessive oil consumption Engine oil level too high Reduce oil level
Incorrect viscosity oil Use correct viscosity
External oil leaks Repair leaks
Blocked breather tube ventilation Replace vent filter

filter
Engine overheats Dirty radiator core Clean
Excessive engine load Shift to a lower gear or reduce load
Low engine oil level Add oil as required.
Low coolant level Fill coolant recovery tank Check

cooling system for leaks
Faulty radiator cap Replace cap
Loose or worn fan belt Check automatic tensioner.

Replace belt if worn
Cooling system blocked Flush cooling system
Malfunctioning thermostat(s) Check thermostats
Hose connection leaking Tighten hose connection
Malfunctioning temperature gauge See your authorised dealer

or sender
4
SECTION 4
ENGINE
Excessive fuel consumption Incorrect type of fuel Use correct fuel
Clogged or dirty air cleaner Service air cleaner
Engine overloaded Shift to lower gear or reduce load
Incorrect valve clearance Check and adjust
Implement incorrectly adjusted See implement operator’s manual

for proper operation
Low engine temperature Check thermostats
Excessive ballast Adjust ballast to current load
Fuel injection nozzles dirty Have authorised dealer service the

injectors
TRANSMISSION
Tractor won’t move after starting Flashing ‘F’ ‘R’ Return shift control lever to neutral
‘P’ ‘U’ and release parking brake. See
or ‘d’ ‘Operator Prompts’
Transmission operation performed
out of sequence
Poor inching control when using Transmission clutches out of Recalibrate transmission clutches
inching pedal calibration F1, F2 and R
Transmission will not operate Fault code displayed indicating See ‘Fault Codes ON/OFF’ and
malfunction contact your authorised dealer
Low transmission oil pressure Low oil supply Fill system with oil
Clogged transmission oil filter Replace filter
5
TROUBLE SHOOTING
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Electrical system is inoperative Loose or corroded battery Clean and tighten connections
connections
Sulphated batteries Check battery open circuit voltage

for 12.6 volts minimum. Check
electrolyte level and specific
gravity
Starter speed low and engine Loose or corroded connections Clean and tighten loose
cranks slowly connections
Low battery output Check battery open circuit voltage

gravity
Incorrect viscosity engine oil Use correct viscosity oil for

temperature conditions
Starter inoperative Transmission shift lever in gear Place shift lever in neutral
Loose or corroded connections Clean and tighten loose

connections
Dead batteries Charge or replace batteries.

Charge indicator lamp stays on Low engine idle speed Increase idle speed
with engine running
Loose belt Check automatic belt tensioner
Malfunctioning battery(ies) Check battery open circuit voltage

gravity.
Malfunctioning alternator Have authorised dealer check

alternator
Batteries will not charge Loose or corroded terminal Clean and tighten connections
connections
Sulphated batteries Check battery open circuit voltage

gravity.
Loose or worn belt Check automatic belt tensioner.

Replace belt if required.
Charge indicator flashing Malfunctioning alternator Have authorised dealer check

indicating excessive charging alternator
voltage
6
SECTION 4
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Complete hydraulic system does Low oil level Fill system

not operate
Restricted hydraulic filter Replace hydraulic filter
Restricted charge pump suction Clean screen
screen
Malfunctioning hydraulic system See your authorised dealer
Hydraulic oil overheats Oil level low or high Adjust oil level
Oil cooler or radiator blocked Clean oil cooler and radiator
Blocked oil filter element Replace filter
Flow control improperly adjusted Adjust flow control to lower flow
position
Hydraulic load or orbit motor not See your authorised dealer
matched to tractor
Hoses will not couple Incorrect male connectors Replace connectors with ISO- 1/2
in. standard connectors available
from your authorised dealer
Remote control valves: Detent release pressure set to low Adjust detent pressure
Detent disengages prematurely
Remote attachment operates too Flow control not properly adjusted Adjust flow control
fast or too slow
Remote attachment does not Hoses not completely connected Attach hoses correctly
operate
Flow checking in couplers Cycle remote levers. If problem
persists replace male couplers
Load exceed system capacity Reduce load or use correct size
cylinder
Lock gate restricts control lever Reposition lock gate
movement
7
TROUBLE SHOOTING
3- POINT HITCH
Hitch does not move when control Hitch not in phase with control Capture the hitch
lever is moved lever
Work/raise switch in raise position Position switch in the work position
Malfunction in lever position or See your authorised dealer

hitch position sensor
Excessive load on hitch Reduce load
Height limit control not properly Adjust upper height limit control
adjusted
Rear fender raise/lower switches Work/raise switch in raise position Position switch in the work position
do not function
Control lever not positioned full Push lever full forward

forward
Hitch does not fully raise Upper height limit control not Adjust height limit control
correctly set
Hitch drops slowly Drop rate control not properly Adjust drop control
adjusted
Hitch slow to respond to draft load Position/draft mix control not Adjust position/draft mix control
properly adjusted
Drop rate too slow Adjust drop rate control
Implement not working properly See implement operator’s manual
Hitch over responsive to draft load Position/draft mix control not Adjust position/draft mix control
properly adjusted
Hitch status light flashes Malfunctioning hitch component(s) See ‘Fault Codes ON/OFF’ and
continually your authorised dealer
Spongy pedal with engine stopped Air in system See your authorised dealer
8
SECTION 4
BRAKES
Pedal bottoms with engine Brake piston seal leaking See your authorised dealer
stopped
Worn brake, discs See your authorised dealer
Brake bleeder not sealing See your authorised dealer
Leakage in brake valve(s) See your authorised dealer
Excessive pedal travel or kickback Leakage in brake valve See your authorised dealer
with engine running
Air in system See your authorised dealer
Brake piston seal leaking See your authorised dealer
Brake bleeder not sealing See your authorised dealer
CAB
Dust enters the cab Improper seal around filter element Check seal condition
Blocked filter Clean or replace filter
Defective filter Replace filter
Excessive air leak(s) Seal air leak(s)
Pressuriser air flow low Blocked filter or blocked Clean or replace filter(s)
recirculation filter
Heater core or evaporator core See your authorised dealer

blocked
Air conditioner does not cool Condenser blocked Clean radiator, oil cooler and
condenser
Low refrigerant Check sight glass for bubbles.

Contact your authorised dealer
Belt slipping or damaged Check automatic belt tensioner

and belt condition
Heater control turned on Turn temperature control knob fully

anti-clockwise for maximum
cooling
9
TROUBLE SHOOTING
NOTES
10
SECTION 5
SPECIFICATIONS
The specifications on the following pages are given for your information and guidance. For further information con-
cerning the tractor consult your authorised dealer.
GENERAL DIMENSIONS 170 h.p. 190 h.p. 210 h.p. 240 h.p.
Height to the Top of Cab in 122.4

(mm) (3109)
Height to the Top of Exhaust in 124.4

(mm) (3159)
Minimum Width in 96.7

(mm) (2456)
Minimum Ground Clearance

Drawbar in 19.7
(mm) (500)
Front Axle in 19.95

(mm) (507)
Track Setting
Front Axle Minimum in 60.0
(mm) (1525)
Front Axle Maximum in 88
(mm) (2235)
Rear Axle Minimum in 60.3

(mm) (1530)
Rear Axle Maximum in 107.8 103.9 103.9 103.9

(mm) (2738) (2639) (2639) (2639)
Overall Length to End of Lower Links

Unballasted in 196.7
(mm) (4997)
Ballasted
- Small Weights in 212.4
(mm) (5396)
- Large Weights in 222.0

(mm) (5639)
To Edge of Rear Tyrein 207.6

- Large Weights (mm) (5273)
1
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL DIMENSIONS (continued) 170 h.p. 190 h.p. 210 h.p. 240 h.p.
Wheelbase:
Standard Steer in 118.3
(mm) (3005)
SuperSteer in 122.6
(mm) (3115)
Turning Radius (without brakes):

Standard Steer in 210
(mm) (5340)
SuperSteer in 180
(mm) (4570)
NOTE: The above dimensions are based on standard tractors fitted with the tyre sizes as shown:
Front 16.9R28
Rear 20.8R42
WEIGHT
Total Weight (without Ballast) lb 17285 18780 18780 18780
(kg) (7839) (8517) (8517) (8517)
On Front Axle lb 5806 6148 6148 6148

(kg) (2633) (2788) (2788) (2788)
On Rear Axle lb 11479 12632 12632 12632

(kg) (5206) (5729) (5729) (5729)
NOTE: The above weights are based on the standard build units and should be used as a guide only.
Additional factory or dealer installed accessories will increase the above tractor weights by:
Add 3rd. remote control valve 20 lb 9 (kg)

Add 4th. remote control valve 20 lb 9 (kg)
Hydraulic system - Megaflow ready 60 lb 27 (kg)
Hydraulic system - Megaflow equipped 105 lb 48 (kg)
112 in. rear axle 58 lb 26 (kg)
Front fenders 86 lb 39 (kg)
Front weight bracket, less SuperSteer 214 lb 97 (kg)
Front weight bracket, with SuperSteer 211 lb 96 (kg)
Front weight package (12 x 88 lb) 1102 lb 500 (kg)
Front weight package (22 x 88 lb) 2015 lb 914 (kg)
Front weight package (16 x 242 lb) 3853 lb1748 (kg)
Rear weight package (10 x 85 lb) 873 lb 396 (kg)
Rear weight package (2 x 450 lb) 912 lb 414 (kg)
2
SECTION 5
ENGINE 170 h.p. 190 h.p. 210 h.p. 240 h.p.
Max Power at Din HP 170 190 210 240

Rated Speed
Rated Speed rev/min. 2100
Low Idle Speed rev/min. ± 25 815
High Idle Speed rev/min. ± 25 2305
Aspiration Turbocharged
Intercooled No No Yes Yes
Number of Cylinders 6
Bore in 4.4
(mm) (111.8)
Stroke in 5.0
(mm) (127)
Displacement in3 456

(Litres) (7.5)
Compression Ratio 17.5:1
Firing order 1.5.3.6.2.4
Valve Tappet Clearance (cold)

Intake in 0.014 - 0.018
(mm) (0.36 - 0.46)
Exhaust in 0.017 - 0.020

(mm) (0.43 - 0.53)
FUEL SYSTEM
Injection Pump Type (In line) Bosch Bosch Bosch Bosch

A 2000 A 2000 P 3000 P 3000
Timing BTDC 24° 21° 16° 16°
Injector Cracking Pressure lbf/in2 3500 3500 3700 3700

(bar) (241) (241) (255) (255)
3
SPECIFICATIONS
COOLING SYSTEM 170 h.p. 190 h.p. 210 h.p. 240 h.p.
Type Pressurised with full flow bypass, recovery tank and filter/conditioner
Thermostats 2
Begin to Open °C 81
(° F) 178
Fully Open °C 95
(° F) 203
Radiator Pressure Cap lbf/in2 13

(bar) (0.9)
Viscous Fan Yes
Number of Blades 8
Fan Diameter in 28
(mm) (711)
TRANSMISSION
Type 18 x 9 Powershift with power shuttle
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Type Closed centre load sensing (CCLS)
Nominal System Pressure lbf/in2 ± 50 2750

(bar ± 3.0) (190)
Hydraulic Pump Variable displacement axial piston pump
Flow at Rated Engine Speed

Standard Imp. gal/min 26
(L/min) (117)
MegaFlow (option) Imp. gal/min 46

(L/min) (208)
Remote Control Valves - Max Flow Capacity at One Coupler

Standard or Imp. gal/min ± 2 20
MegaFlow Pump (L/min ± 8) (91)
4
SECTION 5
THREE-POINT LINKAGE 170 h.p. 190 h.p. 210 h.p. 240 h.p.
Linkage Cat III
Category Adaptor Yes
Maximum lift capacity. Test results to OECD criteria - links horizontal, maximum hydraulic pressure:
lb 15631 15631 19559 19559

at link ends (kg) (7089) (7089) (8870) (8870)
24 in. (612 mm) to lb 12770 12770 16291 16291

rear of link ends (kg) (5791) (5791) (7388) (7388)
POWER TAKE-OFF
Type Independent PTO
Max Power at PTO PTO HP 154 169 200 225

Rated Speed
Engine Speed for Eng. rev/min. 1880 NA NA NA

540 rev/min PTO Speed
Engine Speed for Eng. rev/min. 1900

1000 rev/min. PTO Speed
BRAKES
Type Inboard wet
Disc Diameter OD/ID in 14.5/12.0

(mm) (368/305)
No. of Discs (total) 2 4 4 4
Self Adjusting yes
Parking Brake Rear axle - oil immersed 3 disc
5
SPECIFICATIONS
STEERING 170 h.p. 190 h.p. 210 h.p. 240 h.p.

Type Hydrostatic with tilt and telescopic steering wheel
Maximum Pressure lbf/in2 2500 - 2600

(bar) (166 - 178)
Front Wheel Toe-in in 0.0- 0.25

(mm) (0.0- 6.3)
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Batteries Required 2
CCA Rating 950
Alternator Heavy-Duty 12v - 130 amp
Starter Motor Positive engagement, solenoid operated

6.0 HP (4.5 kw)
MAXIMUM OPERATING ANGLE

Front End Up 25°
Rear End Up 25°
Right Side Up 25°
Left Side Up 25°
FLUID CAPACITIES
Main Fuel Tank Imp. gal 56.2
(Litres) (255)
Auxiliary Fuel Tank Imp. gal 35.4

(Litres) (161)
Total Fuel Capacity Imp. gal 91.5

(Litres) (416)
Cooling System Imp. gal 5.5 5.5 5.8 5.8

(Litres) 25.0 25.0 26.4 26.4
Engine Oil (with filter) Imp. gal 4.6

(Litres) (21.0)
6
SECTION 5
FLUID CAPACITIES (continued) 170 h.p. 190 h.p. 210 h.p. 240 h.p.
Four Wheel Drive Front Hubs (amount shown is for one hub only)
Standard axle Imp. pts 2.8 2.3 2.3 2.3
(Litres) (1.6) (1.3) (1.3) (1.3)
SuperSteer axle Imp. pts 2.3

(Litres) (1.3)
Four Wheel Drive Imp. pts 26.0

Differential Case (Litres) (12.3)
Transmission/Rear Axle/ Imp. gal 30.8

Hydraulic System (Litres) (140)
NOTE: When operating remote cylinders, the rear axle oil level will be affected. When topping up the rear axle
to accommodate the oil requirement of remote cylinders, no more than 8.4 Imp. gallons (38 litres) should be added
to bring the oil level up to the full mark on the dipstick when all rams are fully extended.
Remote cylinders with a total oil capacity of up to 5 Imp. gallons (23 litres) may be connected to the tractor hydraulic
system without adding oil, provided the tractor is being operated on level ground.
GROUND SPEED
The following charts show the ground speeds in MPH and km/h for all models with 40 km/h transmissions, fitted
with 20.8- 42 tyres. If the rear tyres of your tractor are of a different size, multiply the road speeds shown in the
printed charts by the following conversion factors:
NOTE: For your convenience, a blank chart follows each of the printed charts so you may insert your own calcu-
lated road speeds.
Tyre Size 20.8- 38 30.5- 32 580/70R- 38 580/70R- 42 650/65R- 38 710/70R- 38

Conversion Factor 0.948 0.938 0.947 1.000 0.943 1.000
Example:
From the following table for the 170 h.p. model with 20.8- 42 tyres - locate the speed for gear ratio F18 at 2100
engine rev/min. - A forward speed of 25.20 MPH is listed.
To calculate the speed with 20.8- 38 rear tyre for the same gear ratio and engine speed use the following formula:
25.20 (MPH) x 0.948 (conversion factor) = 23.89 MPH.
30 km/h Models
Where local regulations restrict the maximum road speed to 30 km/h, the following road speed charts are
applicable up to F16. The tractor will automatically downshift from F17 or F18 if 30 km/h is exceeded.
7
SPECIFICATIONS
GROUND SPEED: 170 h.p. MODEL WITH 18 x 9 - 40 km/h TRANSMISSION
Gear Ratio 1500 1900 2100

engine rev/min. engine rev/min. engine rev/min.
MPH (km/h) MPH (km/h) MPH (km/h)
FORWARD GEARS
F1 1.22 1.96 1.54 2.48 1.71 2.75
F2 1.44 2.32 1.82 2.94 2.02 3.24
F3 1.69 2.71 2.14 3.43 2.36 3.80
F4 1.93 3.11 2.45 3.93 2.70 4.35
F5 2.28 3.67 2.89 4.65 3.19 5.14
F6 2.67 4.30 3.38 5.44 3.74 6.01
F7 3.14 5.06 3.98 6.41 4.40 7.08
F8 3.71 5.98 4.70 7.57 5.20 8.37
F9 4.35 6.99 5.51 8.86 6.09 9.79
F10 5.05 8.12 6.39 10.29 7.07 11.37
F11 5.96 9.60 7.56 12.16 8.35 13.44
F12 6.96 11.24 8.84 14.23 9.77 15.73
F13 8.00 12.86 10.13 16.29 11.20 18.01
F14 9.45 15.21 11.97 19.26 13.23 21.29
F15 11.06 17.79 14.01 22.54 15.48 24.91
F16 13.01 20.94 16.48 26.53 18.22 29.32
F17 15.39 24.76 19.49 31.36 21.54 34.66
F18 18.00 28.96 22.80 36.69 25.20 40.55
REVERSE GEARS
R2 1.48 2.38 1.87 3.01 2.07 3.33
R3 1.75 2.81 2.21 3.56 2.45 3.93
R4 2.04 3.29 2.59 4.17 2.86 4.60
R5 2.34 3.77 2.97 4.77 3.28 5.27
R6 2.77 4.45 3.51 5.64 3.87 6.23
R7 3.24 5.21 4.10 6.60 4.53 7.29
R8 3.81 6.13 4.83 7.77 5.34 8.59
R9 4.50 7.25 5.71 9.18 6.31 10.15
R10 5.27 8.48 6.68 10.74 7.38 11.87
Based on 20.8 - 42 Rear Tyres

Divide normal speeds by creeper reduction ratio: 10.609 to obtain creeper gear speeds.
8
SECTION 5
GROUND SPEED: 170 h.p. MODEL WITH 18 x 9 - 40 km/h TRANSMISSION
Gear Ratio 1500 1900 2100

FORWARD GEARS
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
REVERSE GEARS
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
Rear Tyre Size:

9
SPECIFICATIONS
GROUND SPEED: 190, 210 and 240 h.p. MODELS WITH 18 x 9 - 40 km/h TRANSMISSION
Gear Ratio 1500 1900 2100

FORWARD GEARS
F1 1.23 1.98 1.56 2.51 1.73 2.78
F2 1.46 2.34 1.84 2.97 2.04 3.28
F3 1.70 2.74 2.16 3.47 2.39 3.84
F4 1.95 3.14 2.47 3.98 2.73 4.40
F5 2.31 3.71 2.92 4.70 3.23 5.20
F6 2.70 4.34 3.42 5.50 3.78 6.08
F7 3.18 5.11 4.03 6.48 4.45 7.16
F8 3.75 6.04 4.76 7.65 5.26 8.46
F9 4.39 7.07 5.57 8.96 6.15 9.90
F10 5.10 8.21 6.46 10.40 7.14 11.50
F11 6.03 9.70 7.64 12.29 8.44 13.59
F12 7.06 11.36 8.94 14.39 9.88 15.90
F13 8.09 13.01 10.24 16.48 11.32 18.21
F14 9.56 15.37 12.11 19.47 13.38 21.52
F15 11.18 17.99 14.16 22.79 15.65 25.19
F16 13.16 21.18 16.67 26.83 18.43 29.65
F17 15.56 25.03 19.71 31.70 21.78 35.04
F18 18.20 29.29 23.05 37.10 25.48 41.00
REVERSE GEARS
R2 1.49 2.40 1.89 3.04 2.09 3.37
R3 1.77 2.84 2.24 3.60 2.47 3.98
R4 2.07 3.32 2.62 4.21 2.89 4.66
R5 2.37 3.81 3.00 4.82 3.31 5.33
R6 2.80 4.50 3.54 5.70 3.92 6.30
R7 3.27 5.27 4.15 6.67 4.58 7.37
R8 3.85 6.20 4.88 7.85 5.40 8.68
R9 4.55 7.33 5.77 9.28 6.38 10.26
R10 5.33 8.57 6.75 10.86 7.46 12.00
Based on 20.8 - 42 Rear Tyres

10
SECTION 5
GROUND SPEED: 190, 210 and 240 h.p. MODELS WITH 18 x 9 - 40 km/h TRANSMISSION
Gear Ratio 1500 1900 2100

FORWARD GEARS
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
REVERSE GEARS
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
Rear Tyre Size:

11
SPECIFICATIONS
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE TYRE COMBINATIONS
The tyres fitted to tractors with optional four wheel drive have been carefully selected to match the gearing of the
transmission and axles. When replacing worn or damaged tyres, always install tyres of the same make, model
and size as those removed. The installation of other tyre combinations may result in excessive tyre wear, loss of
useable power or severe damage to driveline components. If in doubt, consult your authorised dealer.
RADIAL TYRE PRESSURES AND PERMISSIBLE LOADS (front and rear tyres)
Radial tyre performance is denoted by a Load Index

and Speed Symbol replacing the Ply Rating
commonly found on cross ply tyres. Figure 1 shows
typical markings to be found on the side wall of radial
ply tyres.
NOTE: All tyres fitted have a Speed symbol ‘A8’ and

are therefore suitable for speeds up to 40km/h (25
MPH).
The maximum load that may be carried by the tyre

is dependent upon the Load Index shown on the 358- 110
side wall. In the following charts the loads given are 1
for individual tyres operated at speeds up to 30
1. Old ply rating mark
km/h (19 MPH). The right- hand (shaded) column 2. Maximum inflation pressure (in bar)
indicates the maximum load at speeds up to 40 3. Maximum load at 40 km/h (25 MPH)
km/h (25 MPH). 4. Load Index
5. Speed Symbol
IMPORTANT: The figures in the following charts are

for guidance only. Tyre specifications vary by tyre
manufacturer. For exact information regarding Tyre loads may be increased by the following rates,
inflation pressures and loads for your particular tyres, provided that the tyre pressures are increased by
refer to the information provided by the manufacturer 25%.
of the tyres or consult your authorised dealer.
Maximum Speed Load increase
To avoid the possibility of tyre to rim creep, tyre pres- 6 MPH (10 km/h) 70%*
sures below 8.7 lbf/in 2 (0.60 bar) with radial tyres 6 MPH (10 km/h) 50%
should not be used for operations having a high 9 MPH (15 km/h) 34%
torque requirement, e.g., subsoiling, plowing, heavy 12 MPH (20 km/h) 23%
cultivation, etc. 15 MPH (25 km/h) 11%
19 MPH (30 km/h) 7%
Tyre loading figures in the following tables are for a * Only applies to intermittent loading applications
single wheel. To determine the maximum axle loading (moving material with a loader, etc.). Not applicable
for your tractor, multiply the load figure in the table by when operating on hillsides with a gradient exceeding
two (the total number of wheels on the axle). 20%.
12
SECTION 5
Inflation Pressure - lbf/ft2

Load 11.6 13.0 14.5 16.0 17.4 18.9 20.3 21.8 23.2 23.2
Index Load Capacity per TYRE - lb
107 1500 1600 1695 1795 1895 2005 2105 2205 2315 2150
109 1585 1685 1795 1895 2005 2115 2215 2325 2430 2270
114 1830 1950 2070 2180 2315 2425 2545 2665 2780 2600
116 1950 2070 2195 2325 2460 2580 2700 2820 2955 2755
119 2125 2250 2405 2525 2665 2800 2945 3065 3205 3000
121 2250 2380 2535 2690 2830 2985 3130 3275 3430 3195
122 2305 2470 2610 2790 2930 3085 3230 3385 3540 3305
123 2360 2525 2690 2855 3010 3150 3340 3495 4135 3860
124 2435 2600 2775 2945 3110 3285 3450 3615 3780 3525
126 2580 2755 2945 3120 3295 3485 3660 3835 4010 3745
127 2645 2830 3020 3195 3385 3570 3770 3925 4135 3860
128 2710 2910 3110 3295 3485 3680 3870 4055 4245 3970
134 3185 3415 3650 3880 4090 4330 4550 4770 5005 4675
135 3330 3560 3790 4025 4230 4475 4695 4915 5145 4805
136 3415 3660 3890 4135 4355 4585 4815 5050 5280 4940
137 3538 3770 4010 4245 4485 4715 4950 5180 5425 5070
139 3780 4025 4265 4520 4750 5005 5245 5500 5730 5355
141 4010 4265 4530 4785 5050 5315 5555 5820 6085 5675
142 4133 4385 4660 4915 5190 5465 5720 5975 6250 5840
144 4365 4650 4940 5200 5490 5765 6050 6560 6615 6170
146 4595 4905 5225 5535 5840 6150 6460 6770 7075 6615
153 5565 5950 6340 6715 7085 7475 7860 8280 8610 8045
155 5895 6315 6715 7110 7530 7925 8335 8730 9150 8540
157 6250 6690 7130 7560 8000 8430 8860 9390 9735 9095
159 6615 7075 7535 8015 8475 8950 9390 9865 10330 9645
166 8145 8695 9235 9775 10330 10880 11420 11960 12510 11685
168 9435 10025 10615 11055 11825 11825 12675 12675 13205 12345
Inflation Pressure - (bar)

Load 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.6
Index Load Capacity per TYRE - kg
107 680 725 770 815 860 910 955 1000 1050 975
109 720 765 815 860 910 960 1005 1055 1100 1030
114 830 885 940 990 1050 1100 1155 1210 1260 1180
116 885 940 995 1055 1115 1170 1225 1280 1340 1250
119 965 1020 1090 1145 1210 1270 1335 1390 1455 1360
121 1020 1080 1150 1220 1285 1355 1420 1485 1555 1450
122 1045 1120 1185 1265 1330 1400 1465 1535 1605 1500
123 1070 1145 1220 1295 1365 1430 1515 1585 1660 1550
124 1105 1180 1260 1335 1410 1490 1565 1640 1715 1600
126 1170 1250 1335 1415 1495 1580 1660 1740 1820 1700
127 1200 1285 1370 1450 1535 1620 1710 1780 1875 1750
128 1230 1320 1410 1495 1580 1670 1755 1840 1926 1800
134 1445 1550 1655 1760 1855 1965 2065 2165 2270 2120
135 1510 1615 1720 1825 1920 2030 2130 2230 2335 2180
136 1550 1660 1765 1875 1875 2080 2185 2290 2395 2240
137 1605 1710 1820 1925 2035 2140 2245 2350 2460 2300
139 1715 1825 1935 2050 2155 2270 2380 2495 2600 2430
141 1820 1935 2055 2170 2290 2410 2520 2640 2760 2575
142 1875 1990 2115 2230 2355 2480 2595 2710 2836 2650
144 1980 2110 2240 2360 2490 2615 2745 2975 3000 2800
146 2085 2225 2370 2510 2650 2790 2930 3070 3210 3000
153 2525 2700 2875 3045 3215 3390 3565 3755 3905 3650
155 2675 2865 3045 3225 3415 3595 3780 3960 4150 3875
157 2835 3035 3235 3430 3630 3825 4020 4260 4415 4125
159 3000 3210 3420 3635 3845 4060 4260 4475 4685 4375
166 3695 3945 4190 4435 4685 4935 5180 5425 5675 5300
168 4280 4550 4815 5015 5215 5365 5510 5750 5990 5600
13
SPECIFICATIONS
NOTES
14
FIRST 50 HOUR SERVICE
CHECK AND ADJUST, AS REQUIRED

INOPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS: OPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS
1. Tyre pressures and condition . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Lights and instruments for proper

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Air cleaner element and hose connections . .
2. Fluid and oil leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Coolant hoses and clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Maximum no- load speed, idle speed
4. Radiator coolant level and antifreeze pro- adjustments and fuel shutoff . . . . . . . . . . . .
tection (S.G. 1.071- 1.083 at 160 C (600 F) . 4. P.T.O. operation and brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Hydraulic System:
5. Change fuel filter, clean fuel sedimenter
Draft Control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
and bleed system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Position Control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. Poly V belt condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. Change engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure detent operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8. Change hydraulic filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. Transmission selector & EIC gear display . . . .
9. Change transmission filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. Clutch calibration (Powershift transmission) . .
10. Rear axle centre housing oil level . . . . . . . .
11. Change front axle differential oil . . . . . . . . . FUNCTIONAL SERVICE CHECKS:
12. Change front hub oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Engine operation including throttle and
governor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13. Lubricate all grease fittings and pivots . . . .
2. Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14. Wheel disc- to- hub nuts for tightness . . . . . 3. Steering control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15. Wheel- to- rim clamp bolts or 4. Differential lock and FWD engagement
lock nuts for tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Brake action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness . .
6. All optional equipment and accessories . .
17. Front wheel toe-in and steering stops . . . .
18. Battery cables and clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS:

19. Windscreen wiper operation and washer 1. Seat belt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Safety cab bolt torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. P.T.O. and transmission neutral
20. Clean cab air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
start switches operative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21. Seat operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Parking brake operation and adjustment . .
22. Exhaust manifold bolts (30 lbf. ft./40 Nm) . . . 5. All safety guards installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SERVICE PERFORMED
TRACTOR MODEL NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRACTOR SERIAL NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OWNER’S SIGNATURE DATE DEALER’S SIGNATURE DATE
1
2
FIRST 50 HOUR SERVICE
CHECK AND ADJUST, AS REQUIRED

INOPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS: OPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS
1. Tyre pressures and condition . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Lights and instruments for proper

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Air cleaner element and hose connections . .
2. Fluid and oil leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Coolant hoses and clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Maximum no- load speed, idle speed
4. Radiator coolant level and antifreeze pro- adjustments and fuel shutoff . . . . . . . . . . . .
tection (S.G. 1.071- 1.083 at 160 C (600 F) . 4. P.T.O. operation and brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Hydraulic System:
5. Change fuel filter, clean fuel sedimenter
Draft Control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
and bleed system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Position Control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. Poly V belt condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. Change engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure detent operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8. Change hydraulic filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. Transmission selector & EIC gear display . . . .
9. Change transmission filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. Clutch calibration (Powershift transmission) . .
10. Rear axle centre housing oil level . . . . . . . .
11. Change front axle differential oil . . . . . . . . . FUNCTIONAL SERVICE CHECKS:
12. Change front hub oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Engine operation including throttle and
governor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13. Lubricate all grease fittings and pivots . . . .
2. Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14. Wheel disc- to- hub nuts for tightness . . . . . 3. Steering control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15. Wheel- to- rim clamp bolts or 4. Differential lock and FWD engagement
lock nuts for tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Brake action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness . .
6. All optional equipment and accessories . .
17. Front wheel toe-in and steering stops . . . .
18. Battery cables and clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS:

19. Windscreen wiper operation and washer 1. Seat belt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Safety cab bolt torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. P.T.O. and transmission neutral
20. Clean cab air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
start switches operative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21. Seat operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Parking brake operation and adjustment . .
22. Exhaust manifold bolts (30 lbf. ft./40 Nm) . . . 5. All safety guards installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SERVICE PERFORMED
TRACTOR MODEL NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRACTOR SERIAL NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OWNER’S SIGNATURE DATE DEALER’S SIGNATURE DATE
3
4
INDEX
Section/Page No.
Access panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2, 3.4
Airborne noise levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8, 3.12, 3.23, 3.29, 3.36
Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11, 2.6, 3.12, 3.32
Air filter - cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14, 3.26, 3.27, 3.38
Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12, 2.7
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . inside rear cover
Area display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21, 2.29
Attaching equipment to the PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56
Attaching equipment to the three-point hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.79, 2.80
Attaching trailed equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.88
Automatic engine shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6, 2.11, 2.53
Auto shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14, 2.43
Auxiliary sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35
Ballasting and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.95

Bargraph display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52, 3.6, 3.25
Battery voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
Bleeding the fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48
Bleeding remote cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.65
Brakes - maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.47
- operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9, 2.36
- specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
- trouble-shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.53
Cab air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14, 3.26, 3.27, 3.38

Cab - general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi, 2.2, 3.28
- trouble-shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
Cast iron weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.97
Central display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
Cigar lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
Cleaning the cab interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
Clutch calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25, 3.40
Console illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
Continuous flow hydraulic equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64
Coolant/cooling system maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11, 3.12, 3.39, 3.44
Coolant immersion heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51
Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
Cooling system specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
Creeper gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6, 2.47
1
INDEX
Deluxe remote control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16, 2.59

Diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi, 3.2
Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15, 2.15, 2.49
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Distance measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Double- acting cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64
Draft Control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.70
Draining the fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
Drawbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.85, 2.87
Driving the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53
Ecological considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Electrical equipment specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
Electrical system - trouble-shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Electronic instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8, 2.10, 3.55
Engine air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8, 3.12, 3.23, 3.29, 3.36
Engine coolant maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11, 3.12, 3.39, 3.44
Engine coolant heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51
Engine coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Engine hour meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
Engine idle speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Engine lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11, 3.20
Engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
Engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Engine shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6, 2.11, 2.53
Engine specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Engine speed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
Engine starting- stopping procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49
Engine trouble-shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Exhaust temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
External raise- lower switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72
Fast raise switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15, 2.68, 2.73

Fault codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20, 2.21, 2.30, 4.2
Filters - coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39, 3.44
- engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
- fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13, 3.14, 3.22, 3.31
- hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14, 3.34, 3.35
- transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
First 50 hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii, 3.1
Flexible link ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.75
Flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62
Fluid capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
Foot brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10, 2.36, 5.5
Foot throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
Front tow pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19
Four wheel drive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22, 3.23, 3.37, 3.38
Four wheel drive operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14, 2.15, 2.48
Front wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Front wheel track adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.88
2
SECTION 6
Front wheel toe- in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.90

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi, 2.16, 3.2
Fuel filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
Fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13, 3.14, 3.22, 3.31
Fuel injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43
Fuel system specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
Fuses and relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49
Gas strut adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48

Gear shift display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.47
Grease fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Ground speed calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
Ground speed charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Ground speed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19, 2.28
Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4, 2.54, 3.4
Guide blocks, spacers and shims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.77
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9, 2.15, 2.37, 3.47

Hand throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7, 2.32
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15, 2.33, 3.53
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11, 2.7
Height limit control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17, 2.66
Hitch disabled warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20, 2.67
Hitch position display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20, 2.68
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7, 2.33
Hydraulic controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.65
Hydraulic filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14, 3.34, 3.35
Hydraulic oil heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51
Hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.65, 5.4
Hydraulics/rear axle/transmission oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13, 3.33
Hydraulic system trouble-shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Hydraulic trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.82
Idle speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3

Inching pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9, 2.39
Independent power take- off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54
Indicator and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8, 2.10
Instrument console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10, 2.31, 2.32, 3.55
Intercooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12, 2.33
Interior rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
Key- start switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6, 2.50
3
INDEX
Lift control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16, 2.65

Lift rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.74
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7, 2.32
Linkage category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.77
Linkage stabilisers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78
Liquid ballast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.98
Liquid crystal displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Lower links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.74
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside rear cover
Lubrication and maintenance chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Maximum operating angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6

Multi- function switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7, 2.33
Noise levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Oil cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12

Operator prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Operator’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Overhead controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11, 2.6
Panel lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10, 2.31, 2.32

Panel removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4, 3.4
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9, 2.15, 2.37, 3.47
Performance monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
Position Control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.70
Position/Draft Control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16, 2.66
PowerShift transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.38, 5.4
PowerShift transmission control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14, 2.38
Power take- off display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14, 2.19, 2.23
Power take- off operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54
Power take- off specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Power take- off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16, 2.58
Pre- operation checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20
Pressuriser fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11, 2.7
Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Programming the tractor performance monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24
Programming the transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44
Protecting electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
Protective guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Raise- lower switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73
Rate of drop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16
Rear axle/transmission/hydraulics oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13, 3.33
Rear tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.82
Rear wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
4
SECTION 6
Rear wheel track adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.93

Rear window wiper- washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12, 2.8
Remote control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16, 2.59
Remote cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64
Right-hand console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13, 1.18, 2.6
Road speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Rocker cover ventilation filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
Roller drawbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.87
Roof beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7, 2.32, 3.54
Rotary lockout gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16, 2.61
Running- in procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53
Safety chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.87

Safety cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SENZA CODICE, 2.2, 3.28
Safety decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Service interval reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26
Single- acting cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64
Slip alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23, 2.26
Slip control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17, 2.69
Speed matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42
Stabilisers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49
Starting the engine with jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52
Steering specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
Steering stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.92
Steering wheel adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6, 2.5
Stereo radio- cassette player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
Stop lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34, 3.54
Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52
Storing the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56
Sway blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.76
Swinging drawbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.85
Swinging roller drawbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.87
System status lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
Table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Tappet clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
Telescopic stabilisers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78
Temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
Thermostart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7, 2.13, 2.50
Three- point hitch status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17, 2.68
Three- point hitch trouble-shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Three- point linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73, 3., 5.5
Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
Top link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.75
To the owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.82
5
INDEX
Towing the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19

Track adjustment - front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.88
Track adjustment - rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.93
Tractor lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32, 2.33
Tractor performance monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20, 2.24
Tractor preparation (after storage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56
Tractor storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56
Tractor weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.82
Transmission - controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14, 2.38
- trouble-shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
- up/downshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15 2.14, 2.43, 2.44,
Transmission/hydraulics/rear axle oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13, 3.33
Transporting the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20
Trouble-shooting - brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
- cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
- electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
- engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
- hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
- three-point hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
- transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13, 2.15, 2.33, 3.54
Tyre care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99
Tyre pressures and loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Universal symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Valve rocker cover ventilation filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32

Valve tappet clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Walterscheid hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.79

Walterscheid stabilisers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Weighting limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.96
Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Wheelslip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22
Wide swinging roller drawbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.87
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Windscreen wiper- washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12, 2.8, 3.47
Work lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32, 2.34, 3.53
10 hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11

50 hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
300 hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
600 hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
900 hour/annual service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33
1200 hour/annual service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36
2400 hour/2 year service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43

G170 G190 G210 G240: Operator'S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

G170 G190 G210 G240: Operator'S Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

G170 G190 G210 G240: Operator'S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

G170

Section 1 - General Information

Section 3 - Lubrication and Maintenance

Section 4 - Trouble- shooting

First 50- hour Service Forms

After you have operated the tractor for 50 hours, take

Your tractor was designed to power and propel itself. It

NOTE: Tractor identification data must be supplied to

Identification data is needed to aid in identifying the

Vehicle Identification Plate - Figures 1 and 2

Engine Identification - Figure 3

Four Wheel Drive Identification - Figure 4

Transmission Identification - Figure 5

Rear Axle Identification - Figure 6

Cab Identification - Figure 7

Cab Serial No.

IMPORTANT ECOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS

7. Repair any leaks or defects in the engine cooling

4. Replace all missing, illegible or damaged safety

ATTENTION: This text warns the operator of potential

IMPORTANT: This text informs the reader of some-

Failure to follow the CAUTION, WARNING and

DRIVING THE TRACTOR

2. When driving on public roads, have consideration

3. Use a rotating beacon when driving on public

13. Use extreme caution when operating on steep

OPERATING THE TRACTOR

2. Do not start the engine or operate controls (other

4. Avoid accidental contact with the gear shift levers

5. Do not get off the tractor while it is in motion.

10. Do not run the tractor engine in an enclosed build-

11. Pull only from the pick-up hitch, swinging drawbar

2. Do not wear loose clothing when operating the

15. Remember that your tractor, if abused or incor-

16. Do not leave equipment in the raised position

• Do not use your hand to check for leaks. Use a

• Stop the engine and relieve pressure before con-

1. The cooling system operates under pressure

2. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor. Keep

• Tighten all connections before starting the engine

8. Do not modify or alter or permit anyone else to

9. Continuous long term contact with used engine oil

11. Dispose of all drained fluids and removed filters

12. Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care

DIESEL FUEL 9. Always tighten the fuel tank cap securely.

3. Never remove the fuel cap or refuel with the en-

1. Do not modify, drill, weld or alter the safety cab in

2. Never attempt to straighten or weld any part of the

7. Do not fill the fuel tank to capacity. Allow room for

Whenever you see this symbol it means: ATTENTION!

86508550 86508548 86508544

86508549 86508545 86508546

86511860 86508544 86508544

7. Location: Top of right- 8. Location: Below PTO 11. Location: Right-hand

86508547 DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DRIVE FURTHER WITH ALARM

Alternator Transmission Draft

Keep alive Creeper Accessory

Automatic Turn signals Slow or Implement